OpenCores
URL https://opencores.org/ocsvn/or1k/or1k/trunk

Subversion Repositories or1k

[/] [or1k/] [trunk/] [rtems-20020807/] [texinfo.tex] - Blame information for rev 1780

Go to most recent revision | Details | Compare with Previous | View Log

Line No. Rev Author Line
1 1026 ivang
% texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files.
2
%
3
% Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex.
4
\expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi
5
%
6
\def\texinfoversion{2002-06-04.06}
7
%
8
% Copyright (C) 1985, 86, 88, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99,
9
%               2000, 01, 02 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
10
%
11
% This texinfo.tex file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
12
% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
13
% published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at
14
% your option) any later version.
15
%
16
% This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be
17
% useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty
18
% of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
19
% General Public License for more details.
20
%
21
% You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
22
% along with this texinfo.tex file; see the file COPYING.  If not, write
23
% to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
24
% Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
25
%
26
% In other words, you are welcome to use, share and improve this program.
27
% You are forbidden to forbid anyone else to use, share and improve
28
% what you give them.   Help stamp out software-hoarding!
29
%
30
% Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug
31
% reports; you can get the latest version from:
32
%   ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo.tex
33
%     (and all GNU mirrors, see http://www.gnu.org/order/ftp.html)
34
%   ftp://texinfo.org/texinfo/texinfo.tex
35
%   ftp://tug.org/tex/texinfo.tex
36
%     (and all CTAN mirrors, see http://www.ctan.org),
37
%   and /home/gd/gnu/doc/texinfo.tex on the GNU machines.
38
%
39
% The texinfo.tex in any given Texinfo distribution could well be out
40
% of date, so if that's what you're using, please check.
41
%
42
% Texinfo has a small home page at http://texinfo.org/ and also
43
% http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo.
44
%
45
% Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org.  Please include including a
46
% complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the
47
% problem.  Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated.
48
%
49
% To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the
50
% texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution.  For a simple
51
% manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this:
52
%   tex foo.texi
53
%   texindex foo.??
54
%   tex foo.texi
55
%   tex foo.texi
56
%   dvips foo.dvi -o  # or whatever; this makes foo.ps.
57
% The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct.
58
% Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more
59
% than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary.
60
%
61
% It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages.  You can get
62
% the existing language-specific files from the full Texinfo distribution.
63
 
64
\message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:}
65
 
66
% If in a .fmt file, print the version number
67
% and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because
68
% they might have appeared in the input file name.
69
\everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}%
70
  \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active}
71
 
72
% Save some parts of plain tex whose names we will redefine.
73
\let\ptexb=\b
74
\let\ptexbullet=\bullet
75
\let\ptexc=\c
76
\let\ptexcomma=\,
77
\let\ptexdot=\.
78
\let\ptexdots=\dots
79
\let\ptexend=\end
80
\let\ptexequiv=\equiv
81
\let\ptexexclam=\!
82
\let\ptexi=\i
83
\let\ptexlbrace=\{
84
\let\ptexrbrace=\}
85
\let\ptexstar=\*
86
\let\ptext=\t
87
 
88
% We never want plain's outer \+ definition in Texinfo.
89
% For @tex, we can use \tabalign.
90
\let\+ = \relax
91
 
92
\message{Basics,}
93
\chardef\other=12
94
 
95
% If this character appears in an error message or help string, it
96
% starts a new line in the output.
97
\newlinechar = `^^J
98
 
99
% Set up fixed words for English if not already set.
100
\ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined  \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi
101
\ifx\putwordChapter\undefined   \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi
102
\ifx\putwordfile\undefined      \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi
103
\ifx\putwordin\undefined        \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi
104
\ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined     \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi
105
\ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi
106
\ifx\putwordInfo\undefined      \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi
107
\ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi
108
\ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined  \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi
109
\ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined   \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi
110
\ifx\putwordof\undefined        \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi
111
\ifx\putwordon\undefined        \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi
112
\ifx\putwordpage\undefined      \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi
113
\ifx\putwordsection\undefined   \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi
114
\ifx\putwordSection\undefined   \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi
115
\ifx\putwordsee\undefined       \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi
116
\ifx\putwordSee\undefined       \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi
117
\ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined  \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi
118
\ifx\putwordTOC\undefined       \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi
119
%
120
\ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi
121
\ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi
122
\ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi
123
\ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi
124
\ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi
125
\ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi
126
\ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi
127
\ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi
128
\ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi
129
\ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi
130
\ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi
131
\ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi
132
%
133
\ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi
134
\ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined   \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi
135
\ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi
136
\ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi
137
\ifx\putwordDeftypevar\undefined\gdef\putwordDeftypevar{Variable}\fi
138
\ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined   \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi
139
\ifx\putwordDeftypefun\undefined\gdef\putwordDeftypefun{Function}\fi
140
 
141
% Ignore a token.
142
%
143
\def\gobble#1{}
144
 
145
\hyphenation{ap-pen-dix}
146
\hyphenation{mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers}
147
\hyphenation{eshell}
148
\hyphenation{white-space}
149
 
150
% Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.
151
\newdimen \bindingoffset
152
\newdimen \normaloffset
153
\newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight
154
 
155
% Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file
156
% and nothing on the terminal.  We don't just call \tracingall here,
157
% since that produces some useless output on the terminal.
158
%
159
\def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}%
160
\ifx\eTeXversion\undefined
161
\def\loggingall{\tracingcommands2 \tracingstats2
162
   \tracingpages1 \tracingoutput1 \tracinglostchars1
163
   \tracingmacros2 \tracingparagraphs1 \tracingrestores1
164
   \showboxbreadth\maxdimen\showboxdepth\maxdimen
165
}%
166
\else
167
\def\loggingall{\tracingcommands3 \tracingstats2
168
   \tracingpages1 \tracingoutput1 \tracinglostchars1
169
   \tracingmacros2 \tracingparagraphs1 \tracingrestores1
170
   \tracingscantokens1 \tracingassigns1 \tracingifs1
171
   \tracinggroups1 \tracingnesting2
172
   \showboxbreadth\maxdimen\showboxdepth\maxdimen
173
}%
174
\fi
175
 
176
% add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions.  If the last thing
177
% we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space.
178
%
179
\def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount
180
  \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi}
181
\def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount
182
  \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi}
183
\def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount
184
  \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi}
185
 
186
% For @cropmarks command.
187
% Do @cropmarks to get crop marks.
188
%
189
\newif\ifcropmarks
190
\let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue
191
%
192
% Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners.
193
% Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986
194
%
195
\newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines
196
\newdimen\cornerlong  \cornerlong=1pc
197
\newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt
198
\newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in
199
 
200
% Main output routine.
201
\chardef\PAGE = 255
202
\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}
203
 
204
\newbox\headlinebox
205
\newbox\footlinebox
206
 
207
% \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument.  Note that \pagecontents
208
% does insertions, but you have to call it yourself.
209
\def\onepageout#1{%
210
  \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi
211
  %
212
  \ifodd\pageno  \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset
213
  \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi
214
  %
215
  % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in
216
  % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code).
217
  \setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}%
218
  \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}%
219
  %
220
  {%
221
    % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to
222
    % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends
223
    % before the \shipout runs.
224
    %
225
    \escapechar = `\\     % use backslash in output files.
226
    \indexdummies         % don't expand commands in the output.
227
    \normalturnoffactive  % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if
228
                   % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example.
229
    \shipout\vbox{%
230
      % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page.
231
      \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfmkdest{\the\pageno} \fi
232
      %
233
      \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup
234
        \hsize = \outerhsize
235
        \vskip-\topandbottommargin
236
        \vtop to0pt{%
237
          \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}%
238
          \nointerlineskip
239
          \line{%
240
            \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}%
241
            \hfill
242
            \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}%
243
          }%
244
          \vss}%
245
        \vskip\topandbottommargin
246
        \line\bgroup
247
          \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize.
248
          \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi
249
          \vbox\bgroup
250
      \fi
251
      %
252
      \unvbox\headlinebox
253
      \pagebody{#1}%
254
      \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt
255
        % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty.
256
        % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingxxx.)
257
        % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect.
258
        \vskip 2\baselineskip
259
        \unvbox\footlinebox
260
      \fi
261
      %
262
      \ifcropmarks
263
          \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup
264
        \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup
265
        \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill
266
        \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick
267
        \vbox to0pt{\vss
268
          \line{%
269
            \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}%
270
            \hfill
271
            \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}%
272
          }%
273
          \nointerlineskip
274
          \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}%
275
        }%
276
      \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause
277
      \fi
278
    }% end of \shipout\vbox
279
  }% end of group with \turnoffactive
280
  \advancepageno
281
  \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi
282
}
283
 
284
\newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen
285
 
286
\def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}}
287
{\catcode`\@ =11
288
\gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi
289
% marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala)
290
\ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present
291
  \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi
292
\dimen@=\dp#1 \unvbox#1
293
\ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi
294
\ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi}
295
}
296
 
297
% Here are the rules for the cropmarks.  Note that they are
298
% offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize
299
% (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986)
300
%
301
\def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong}
302
\def\nstop{\vbox
303
  {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}}
304
\def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong}
305
\def\nsbot{\vbox
306
  {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}}
307
 
308
% Parse an argument, then pass it to #1.  The argument is the rest of
309
% the input line (except we remove a trailing comment).  #1 should be a
310
% macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument.
311
%
312
\def\parsearg#1{%
313
  \let\next = #1%
314
  \begingroup
315
    \obeylines
316
    \futurelet\temp\parseargx
317
}
318
 
319
% If the next token is an obeyed space (from an @example environment or
320
% the like), remove it and recurse.  Otherwise, we're done.
321
\def\parseargx{%
322
  % \obeyedspace is defined far below, after the definition of \sepspaces.
323
  \ifx\obeyedspace\temp
324
    \expandafter\parseargdiscardspace
325
  \else
326
    \expandafter\parseargline
327
  \fi
328
}
329
 
330
% Remove a single space (as the delimiter token to the macro call).
331
{\obeyspaces %
332
 \gdef\parseargdiscardspace {\futurelet\temp\parseargx}}
333
 
334
{\obeylines %
335
  \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{%
336
    \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg.
337
    %
338
    % First remove any @c comment, then any @comment.
339
    % Result of each macro is put in \toks0.
340
    \argremovec #1\c\relax %
341
    \expandafter\argremovecomment \the\toks0 \comment\relax %
342
    %
343
    % Call the caller's macro, saved as \next in \parsearg.
344
    \expandafter\next\expandafter{\the\toks0}%
345
  }%
346
}
347
 
348
% Since all \c{,omment} does is throw away the argument, we can let TeX
349
% do that for us.  The \relax here is matched by the \relax in the call
350
% in \parseargline; it could be more or less anything, its purpose is
351
% just to delimit the argument to the \c.
352
\def\argremovec#1\c#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}}
353
\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}}
354
 
355
% \argremovec{,omment} might leave us with trailing spaces, though; e.g.,
356
%    @end itemize  @c foo
357
% will have two active spaces as part of the argument with the
358
% `itemize'.  Here we remove all active spaces from #1, and assign the
359
% result to \toks0.
360
%
361
% This loses if there are any *other* active characters besides spaces
362
% in the argument -- _ ^ +, for example -- since they get expanded.
363
% Fortunately, Texinfo does not define any such commands.  (If it ever
364
% does, the catcode of the characters in questionwill have to be changed
365
% here.)  But this means we cannot call \removeactivespaces as part of
366
% \argremovec{,omment}, since @c uses \parsearg, and thus the argument
367
% that \parsearg gets might well have any character at all in it.
368
%
369
\def\removeactivespaces#1{%
370
  \begingroup
371
    \ignoreactivespaces
372
    \edef\temp{#1}%
373
    \global\toks0 = \expandafter{\temp}%
374
  \endgroup
375
}
376
 
377
% Change the active space to expand to nothing.
378
%
379
\begingroup
380
  \obeyspaces
381
  \gdef\ignoreactivespaces{\obeyspaces\let =\empty}
382
\endgroup
383
 
384
 
385
\def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next}
386
 
387
%% These are used to keep @begin/@end levels from running away
388
%% Call \inENV within environments (after a \begingroup)
389
\newif\ifENV \ENVfalse \def\inENV{\ifENV\relax\else\ENVtrue\fi}
390
\def\ENVcheck{%
391
\ifENV\errmessage{Still within an environment; press RETURN to continue}
392
\endgroup\fi} % This is not perfect, but it should reduce lossage
393
 
394
% @begin foo  is the same as @foo, for now.
395
\newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.}
396
 
397
\outer\def\begin{\parsearg\beginxxx}
398
 
399
\def\beginxxx #1{%
400
\expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\relax
401
{\errhelp=\EMsimple \errmessage{Undefined command @begin #1}}\else
402
\csname #1\endcsname\fi}
403
 
404
% @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.
405
%
406
\def\end{\parsearg\endxxx}
407
\def\endxxx #1{%
408
  \removeactivespaces{#1}%
409
  \edef\endthing{\the\toks0}%
410
  %
411
  \expandafter\ifx\csname E\endthing\endcsname\relax
412
    \expandafter\ifx\csname \endthing\endcsname\relax
413
      % There's no \foo, i.e., no ``environment'' foo.
414
      \errhelp = \EMsimple
415
      \errmessage{Undefined command `@end \endthing'}%
416
    \else
417
      \unmatchedenderror\endthing
418
    \fi
419
  \else
420
    % Everything's ok; the right environment has been started.
421
    \csname E\endthing\endcsname
422
  \fi
423
}
424
 
425
% There is an environment #1, but it hasn't been started.  Give an error.
426
%
427
\def\unmatchedenderror#1{%
428
  \errhelp = \EMsimple
429
  \errmessage{This `@end #1' doesn't have a matching `@#1'}%
430
}
431
 
432
% Define the control sequence \E#1 to give an unmatched @end error.
433
%
434
\def\defineunmatchedend#1{%
435
  \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\unmatchedenderror{#1}}%
436
}
437
 
438
 
439
% Single-spacing is done by various environments (specifically, in
440
% \nonfillstart and \quotations).
441
\newskip\singlespaceskip \singlespaceskip = 12.5pt
442
\def\singlespace{%
443
  % Why was this kern here?  It messes up equalizing space above and below
444
  % environments.  --karl, 6may93
445
  %{\advance \baselineskip by -\singlespaceskip
446
  %\kern \baselineskip}%
447
  \setleading\singlespaceskip
448
}
449
 
450
%% Simple single-character @ commands
451
 
452
% @@ prints an @
453
% Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr).
454
\def\@{{\tt\char64}}
455
 
456
% This is turned off because it was never documented
457
% and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures.
458
%% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and '
459
%% but suppressing ligatures.
460
%\def\`{{`}}
461
%\def\'{{'}}
462
 
463
% Used to generate quoted braces.
464
\def\mylbrace {{\tt\char123}}
465
\def\myrbrace {{\tt\char125}}
466
\let\{=\mylbrace
467
\let\}=\myrbrace
468
\begingroup
469
  % Definitions to produce actual \{ & \} command in an index.
470
  \catcode`\{ = 12 \catcode`\} = 12
471
  \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2
472
  \catcode`\@ = 0 \catcode`\\ = 12
473
  @gdef@lbracecmd[\{]%
474
  @gdef@rbracecmd[\}]%
475
@endgroup
476
 
477
% Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent
478
% Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @v @H.
479
\let\, = \c
480
\let\dotaccent = \.
481
\def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}}
482
\let\tieaccent = \t
483
\let\ubaraccent = \b
484
\let\udotaccent = \d
485
 
486
% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown
487
% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (and lowercase versions) @ss.
488
\def\questiondown{?`}
489
\def\exclamdown{!`}
490
 
491
% Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.
492
\def\imacro{i}
493
\def\jmacro{j}
494
\def\dotless#1{%
495
  \def\temp{#1}%
496
  \ifx\temp\imacro \ptexi
497
  \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \j
498
  \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}%
499
  \fi\fi
500
}
501
 
502
% Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space
503
% equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space
504
% at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and
505
% since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the
506
% penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph.
507
{\catcode`@ = 11
508
 % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble
509
 % if the definition is written into an index file.
510
 \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M
511
 \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ }
512
}
513
 
514
% @: forces normal size whitespace following.
515
\def\:{\spacefactor=1000 }
516
 
517
% @* forces a line break.
518
\def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces}
519
 
520
% @. is an end-of-sentence period.
521
\def\.{.\spacefactor=3000 }
522
 
523
% @! is an end-of-sentence bang.
524
\def\!{!\spacefactor=3000 }
525
 
526
% @? is an end-of-sentence query.
527
\def\?{?\spacefactor=3000 }
528
 
529
% @w prevents a word break.  Without the \leavevmode, @w at the
530
% beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would
531
% produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph.
532
\def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}}
533
 
534
% @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing
535
% it in a TeX vbox.  We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box
536
% to keep its height that of a normal line.  According to the rules for
537
% \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is
538
% max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0).  If that height is large,
539
% therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and
540
% the text is small, which looks bad.
541
%
542
\def\group{\begingroup
543
  \ifnum\catcode13=\active \else
544
    \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp
545
    \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}%
546
  \fi
547
  %
548
  % The \vtop we start below produces a box with normal height and large
549
  % depth; thus, TeX puts \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the
550
  % next line of text is done) \lineskip glue after it.  (See p.82 of
551
  % the TeXbook.)  Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
552
  % above.  But it's pretty close.
553
  \def\Egroup{%
554
    \egroup           % End the \vtop.
555
    \endgroup         % End the \group.
556
  }%
557
  %
558
  \vtop\bgroup
559
    % We have to put a strut on the last line in case the @group is in
560
    % the midst of an example, rather than completely enclosing it.
561
    % Otherwise, the interline space between the last line of the group
562
    % and the first line afterwards is too small.  But we can't put the
563
    % strut in \Egroup, since there it would be on a line by itself.
564
    % Hence this just inserts a strut at the beginning of each line.
565
    \everypar = {\strut}%
566
    %
567
    % Since we have a strut on every line, we don't need any of TeX's
568
    % normal interline spacing.
569
    \offinterlineskip
570
    %
571
    % OK, but now we have to do something about blank
572
    % lines in the input in @example-like environments, which normally
573
    % just turn into \lisppar, which will insert no space now that we've
574
    % turned off the interline space.  Simplest is to make them be an
575
    % empty paragraph.
576
    \ifx\par\lisppar
577
      \edef\par{\leavevmode \par}%
578
      %
579
      % Reset ^^M's definition to new definition of \par.
580
      \obeylines
581
    \fi
582
    %
583
    % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as
584
    % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an
585
    % end-of-line in the output.  We don't want the end-of-line after
586
    % the `@group' to put extra space in the output.  Since @group
587
    % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo
588
    % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text.
589
    \comment
590
}
591
%
592
% TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help
593
% message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'.
594
%
595
\newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{%
596
group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J%
597
where each line of input produces a line of output.}
598
 
599
% @need space-in-mils
600
% forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining.
601
 
602
\newdimen\mil  \mil=0.001in
603
 
604
\def\need{\parsearg\needx}
605
 
606
% Old definition--didn't work.
607
%\def\needx #1{\par %
608
%% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally
609
%% if the depth of the box does not fit.
610
%{\baselineskip=0pt%
611
%\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\nobreak
612
%\prevdepth=-1000pt
613
%}}
614
 
615
\def\needx#1{%
616
  % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a
617
  % paragraph.
618
  \par
619
  %
620
  % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless.
621
  \dimen0 = #1\mil
622
  \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox
623
  \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox
624
  \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2
625
    %
626
    % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the
627
    % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line.
628
    % And a page break here is fine.
629
    \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}%
630
    %
631
    % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the
632
    % main vertical list is 10000 or more.  But in order to see if the
633
    % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider
634
    % page breaks.  On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the
635
    % page after the empty box.  So we use a penalty of 9999.
636
    %
637
    % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the
638
    % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in
639
    % sight.  (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which
640
    % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing
641
    % good page breaking, for example.)  However, I could not construct an
642
    % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real
643
    % document, then we can reconsider our strategy.
644
    \penalty9999
645
    %
646
    % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not.
647
    \kern -#1\mil
648
    %
649
    % Do not allow a page break right after this kern.
650
    \nobreak
651
  \fi
652
}
653
 
654
% @br   forces paragraph break
655
 
656
\let\br = \par
657
 
658
% @dots{} output an ellipsis using the current font.
659
% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in a typewriter
660
% font as three actual period characters.
661
%
662
\def\dots{%
663
  \leavevmode
664
  \hbox to 1.5em{%
665
    \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil
666
    .\hss.\hss.%
667
    \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil
668
  }%
669
}
670
 
671
% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
672
%
673
\def\enddots{%
674
  \leavevmode
675
  \hbox to 2em{%
676
    \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil
677
    .\hss.\hss.\hss.%
678
    \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil
679
  }%
680
  \spacefactor=3000
681
}
682
 
683
 
684
% @page    forces the start of a new page
685
%
686
\def\page{\par\vfill\supereject}
687
 
688
% @exdent text....
689
% outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin
690
 
691
% This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment.
692
% That's how much \exdent should take out.
693
\newskip\exdentamount
694
 
695
% This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun.
696
\def\exdent{\parsearg\exdentyyy}
697
\def\exdentyyy #1{{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}}
698
 
699
% This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example.
700
\def\nofillexdent{\parsearg\nofillexdentyyy}
701
\def\nofillexdentyyy #1{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount
702
\leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
703
 
704
% @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current
705
% paragraph.  For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion
706
% class.  WHICH is `l' or `r'.
707
%
708
\newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm
709
\def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox}
710
%
711
\def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{%
712
  \nobreak
713
  \kern-\strutdepth
714
  \vtop to \strutdepth{%
715
    \baselineskip=\strutdepth
716
    \vss
717
    % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to
718
    % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size.
719
    \ifx#1l%
720
      \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}%
721
    \else
722
      \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}%
723
    \fi
724
    \null
725
  }%
726
}}
727
\def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l}
728
\def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r}
729
%
730
% @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]}
731
% (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right;
732
% else use TEXT for both).
733
%
734
\def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish}
735
\def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing.
736
  \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
737
  \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
738
    \def\lefttext{#1}%  have both texts
739
    \def\righttext{#2}%
740
  \else
741
    \def\lefttext{#1}%  have only one text
742
    \def\righttext{#1}%
743
  \fi
744
  %
745
  \ifodd\pageno
746
    \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin
747
  \else
748
    \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}%
749
  \fi
750
  \temp
751
}
752
 
753
% @include file    insert text of that file as input.
754
% Allow normal characters that  we make active in the argument (a file name).
755
\def\include{\begingroup
756
  \catcode`\\=12
757
  \catcode`~=12
758
  \catcode`^=12
759
  \catcode`_=12
760
  \catcode`|=12
761
  \catcode`<=12
762
  \catcode`>=12
763
  \catcode`+=12
764
  \parsearg\includezzz}
765
% Restore active chars for included file.
766
\def\includezzz#1{\endgroup\begingroup
767
  % Read the included file in a group so nested @include's work.
768
  \def\thisfile{#1}%
769
  \input\thisfile
770
\endgroup}
771
 
772
\def\thisfile{}
773
 
774
% @center line   outputs that line, centered
775
 
776
\def\center{\parsearg\centerzzz}
777
\def\centerzzz #1{{\advance\hsize by -\leftskip
778
\advance\hsize by -\rightskip
779
\centerline{#1}}}
780
 
781
% @sp n   outputs n lines of vertical space
782
 
783
\def\sp{\parsearg\spxxx}
784
\def\spxxx #1{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
785
 
786
% @comment ...line which is ignored...
787
% @c is the same as @comment
788
% @ignore ... @end ignore  is another way to write a comment
789
 
790
\def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other%
791
\catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other%
792
\commentxxx}
793
{\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}}
794
 
795
\let\c=\comment
796
 
797
% @paragraphindent NCHARS
798
% We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough.
799
% We cannot implement @paragraphindent asis, though.
800
%
801
\def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords
802
\def\noneword{none}
803
%
804
\def\paragraphindent{\parsearg\doparagraphindent}
805
\def\doparagraphindent#1{%
806
  \def\temp{#1}%
807
  \ifx\temp\asisword
808
  \else
809
    \ifx\temp\noneword
810
      \defaultparindent = 0pt
811
    \else
812
      \defaultparindent = #1em
813
    \fi
814
  \fi
815
  \parindent = \defaultparindent
816
}
817
 
818
% @exampleindent NCHARS
819
% We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent.
820
% It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but
821
% I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent.
822
\def\exampleindent{\parsearg\doexampleindent}
823
\def\doexampleindent#1{%
824
  \def\temp{#1}%
825
  \ifx\temp\asisword
826
  \else
827
    \ifx\temp\noneword
828
      \lispnarrowing = 0pt
829
    \else
830
      \lispnarrowing = #1em
831
    \fi
832
  \fi
833
}
834
 
835
% @asis just yields its argument.  Used with @table, for example.
836
%
837
\def\asis#1{#1}
838
 
839
% @math outputs its argument in math mode.
840
% We don't use $'s directly in the definition of \math because we need
841
% to set catcodes according to plain TeX first, to allow for subscripts,
842
% superscripts, special math chars, etc.
843
%
844
% @math does not do math typesetting in section titles, index
845
% entries, and other such contexts where the catcodes are set before
846
% @math gets a chance to work.  This could perhaps be fixed, but for now
847
% at least we can have real math in the main text, where it's needed most.
848
%
849
\let\implicitmath = $%$ font-lock fix
850
%
851
% One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean
852
% an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}.  So make
853
% _ within @math be active (mathcode "8000), and distinguish by seeing
854
% if the current family is \slfam, which is what @var uses.
855
%
856
{\catcode95 = \active  % 95 = _
857
\gdef\mathunderscore{%
858
  \catcode95=\active
859
  \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}%
860
}}
861
%
862
% Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a \ character.
863
% FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (why?), but
864
% this is not advertised and we don't care.  Texinfo does not
865
% otherwise define @\.
866
%
867
% The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\.
868
\def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi}
869
%
870
\def\math{%
871
  \tex
872
  \mathcode`\_="8000 \mathunderscore
873
  \let\\ = \mathbackslash
874
  \implicitmath\finishmath}
875
\def\finishmath#1{#1\implicitmath\Etex}
876
 
877
% @bullet and @minus need the same treatment as @math, just above.
878
\def\bullet{\implicitmath\ptexbullet\implicitmath}
879
\def\minus{\implicitmath-\implicitmath}
880
 
881
% @refill is a no-op.
882
\let\refill=\relax
883
 
884
% If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to
885
% be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs.
886
% This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename).
887
%
888
\newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files.
889
\let\novalidate = \linksfalse
890
 
891
% @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file.
892
% So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input.
893
% This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo.
894
\def\setfilename{%
895
   \iflinks
896
     \readauxfile
897
   \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case.
898
   \openindices
899
   \fixbackslash  % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'.
900
   \global\let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds.
901
   %
902
   % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it.
903
   % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc.
904
   % Just to be on the safe side, close the input stream before the \input.
905
   \openin 1 texinfo.cnf
906
   \ifeof1 \let\temp=\relax \else \def\temp{\input texinfo.cnf }\fi
907
   \closein1
908
   \temp
909
   %
910
   \comment % Ignore the actual filename.
911
}
912
 
913
% Called from \setfilename.
914
%
915
\def\openindices{%
916
  \newindex{cp}%
917
  \newcodeindex{fn}%
918
  \newcodeindex{vr}%
919
  \newcodeindex{tp}%
920
  \newcodeindex{ky}%
921
  \newcodeindex{pg}%
922
}
923
 
924
% @bye.
925
\outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend}
926
 
927
 
928
\message{pdf,}
929
% adobe `portable' document format
930
\newcount\tempnum
931
\newcount\lnkcount
932
\newtoks\filename
933
\newcount\filenamelength
934
\newcount\pgn
935
\newtoks\toksA
936
\newtoks\toksB
937
\newtoks\toksC
938
\newtoks\toksD
939
\newbox\boxA
940
\newcount\countA
941
\newif\ifpdf
942
\newif\ifpdfmakepagedest
943
 
944
\ifx\pdfoutput\undefined
945
  \pdffalse
946
  \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble
947
  \let\pdfurl = \gobble
948
  \let\endlink = \relax
949
  \let\linkcolor = \relax
950
  \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax
951
\else
952
  \pdftrue
953
  \pdfoutput = 1
954
  \input pdfcolor
955
  \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{%
956
    \def\imagewidth{#2}%
957
    \def\imageheight{#3}%
958
    % without \immediate, pdftex seg faults when the same image is
959
    % included twice.  (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.)
960
    \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
961
      \immediate\pdfimage
962
    \else
963
      \immediate\pdfximage
964
    \fi
965
      \ifx\empty\imagewidth\else width \imagewidth \fi
966
      \ifx\empty\imageheight\else height \imageheight \fi
967
      \ifnum\pdftexversion<13
968
         #1.pdf%
969
       \else
970
         {#1.pdf}%
971
       \fi
972
    \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else
973
      \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage
974
    \fi}
975
  \def\pdfmkdest#1{{\normalturnoffactive \pdfdest name{#1} xyz}}
976
  \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1}
977
  \let\linkcolor = \Blue  % was Cyan, but that seems light?
978
  \def\endlink{\Black\pdfendlink}
979
  % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines
980
  % come from Petr Olsak
981
  \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0%
982
    \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi}
983
  \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax
984
    \advance\tempnum by1
985
    \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}}
986
  \def\pdfmakeoutlines{{%
987
    \openin 1 \jobname.toc
988
    \ifeof 1\else\begingroup
989
      \closein 1
990
      \indexnofonts
991
      \def\tt{}
992
      \let\_ = \normalunderscore
993
      % Thanh's hack / proper braces in bookmarks
994
      \edef\mylbrace{\iftrue \string{\else}\fi}\let\{=\mylbrace
995
      \edef\myrbrace{\iffalse{\else\string}\fi}\let\}=\myrbrace
996
      %
997
      \def\chapentry ##1##2##3{}
998
      \let\appendixentry = \chapentry
999
      \def\unnumbchapentry ##1##2{}
1000
      \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{\advancenumber{chap##2}}
1001
      \def\unnumbsecentry ##1##2##3{\advancenumber{chap##2}}
1002
      \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{\advancenumber{sec##2.##3}}
1003
      \def\unnumbsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4{\advancenumber{sec##2.##3}}
1004
      \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{\advancenumber{subsec##2.##3.##4}}
1005
      \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{\advancenumber{subsec##2.##3.##4}}
1006
      \input \jobname.toc
1007
      \def\chapentry ##1##2##3{%
1008
        \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##3}}count-\expnumber{chap##2}{##1}}
1009
      \let\appendixentry = \chapentry
1010
      \def\unnumbchapentry ##1##2{%
1011
        \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##2}}{##1}}
1012
      \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{%
1013
        \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##4}}count-\expnumber{sec##2.##3}{##1}}
1014
      \def\unnumbsecentry ##1##2##3{%
1015
        \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##3}}{##1}}
1016
      \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{%
1017
        \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##5}}count-\expnumber{subsec##2.##3.##4}{##1}}
1018
      \def\unnumbsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4{%
1019
        \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##4}}{##1}}
1020
      \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{%
1021
        \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##6}}{##1}}
1022
      \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{%
1023
        \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##5}}{##1}}
1024
      \input \jobname.toc
1025
    \endgroup\fi
1026
  }}
1027
  \def\makelinks #1,{%
1028
    \def\params{#1}\def\E{END}%
1029
    \ifx\params\E
1030
      \let\nextmakelinks=\relax
1031
    \else
1032
      \let\nextmakelinks=\makelinks
1033
      \ifnum\lnkcount>0,\fi
1034
      \picknum{#1}%
1035
      \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}
1036
        goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\the\pgn}}%
1037
      \linkcolor #1%
1038
      \advance\lnkcount by 1%
1039
      \endlink
1040
    \fi
1041
    \nextmakelinks
1042
  }
1043
  \def\picknum#1{\expandafter\pn#1}
1044
  \def\pn#1{%
1045
    \def\p{#1}%
1046
    \ifx\p\lbrace
1047
      \let\nextpn=\ppn
1048
    \else
1049
      \let\nextpn=\ppnn
1050
      \def\first{#1}
1051
    \fi
1052
    \nextpn
1053
  }
1054
  \def\ppn#1{\pgn=#1\gobble}
1055
  \def\ppnn{\pgn=\first}
1056
  \def\pdfmklnk#1{\lnkcount=0\makelinks #1,END,}
1057
  \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
1058
  \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}%
1059
    \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax
1060
    \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces
1061
      \ifx\p\space\else\addtokens{\filename}{\PP}%
1062
        \advance\filenamelength by 1
1063
      \fi
1064
    \fi
1065
    \nextsp}
1066
  \def\getfilename#1{\filenamelength=0\expandafter\skipspaces#1|\relax}
1067
  \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
1068
    \let \startlink \pdfannotlink
1069
  \else
1070
    \let \startlink \pdfstartlink
1071
  \fi
1072
  \def\pdfurl#1{%
1073
    \begingroup
1074
      \normalturnoffactive\def\@{@}%
1075
      \let\value=\expandablevalue
1076
      \leavevmode\Red
1077
      \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
1078
        user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}%
1079
        % #1
1080
    \endgroup}
1081
  \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}}
1082
  \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
1083
  \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks}
1084
  \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}}
1085
  \def\maketoks{%
1086
    \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|
1087
    \ifx\first0\adn0
1088
    \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3
1089
    \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6
1090
    \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9
1091
    \else
1092
      \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi
1093
      \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else
1094
        \let\next=\maketoks
1095
        \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD}
1096
        \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi
1097
      \fi
1098
    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
1099
    \next}
1100
  \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}%
1101
    {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0}
1102
  \def\pdflink#1{%
1103
    \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}}
1104
    \linkcolor #1\endlink}
1105
  \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st}
1106
\fi % \ifx\pdfoutput
1107
 
1108
 
1109
\message{fonts,}
1110
% Font-change commands.
1111
 
1112
% Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not.
1113
% So we set up a \sf analogous to plain's \rm, etc.
1114
\newfam\sffam
1115
\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \tensf}
1116
\let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf.
1117
 
1118
% We don't need math for this one.
1119
\def\ttsl{\tenttsl}
1120
 
1121
% Default leading.
1122
\newdimen\textleading  \textleading = 13.2pt
1123
 
1124
% Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size
1125
% correspondingly.  There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers
1126
% used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined.
1127
%
1128
\def\lineskipfactor{.08333}
1129
\def\strutheightpercent{.70833}
1130
\def\strutdepthpercent {.29167}
1131
%
1132
\def\setleading#1{%
1133
  \normalbaselineskip = #1\relax
1134
  \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip
1135
  \normalbaselines
1136
  \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{%
1137
    \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip
1138
                    depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip
1139
  }%
1140
}
1141
 
1142
% Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the
1143
% specified font prefix (normally `cm').
1144
% #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor
1145
\def\setfont#1#2#3#4{\font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4}
1146
 
1147
% Use cm as the default font prefix.
1148
% To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix
1149
% before you read in texinfo.tex.
1150
\ifx\fontprefix\undefined
1151
\def\fontprefix{cm}
1152
\fi
1153
% Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM.
1154
\def\rmshape{r}
1155
\def\rmbshape{bx}               %where the normal face is bold
1156
\def\bfshape{b}
1157
\def\bxshape{bx}
1158
\def\ttshape{tt}
1159
\def\ttbshape{tt}
1160
\def\ttslshape{sltt}
1161
\def\itshape{ti}
1162
\def\itbshape{bxti}
1163
\def\slshape{sl}
1164
\def\slbshape{bxsl}
1165
\def\sfshape{ss}
1166
\def\sfbshape{ss}
1167
\def\scshape{csc}
1168
\def\scbshape{csc}
1169
 
1170
\newcount\mainmagstep
1171
\ifx\bigger\relax
1172
  % not really supported.
1173
  \let\mainmagstep=\magstep1
1174
  \setfont\textrm\rmshape{12}{1000}
1175
  \setfont\texttt\ttshape{12}{1000}
1176
\else
1177
  \mainmagstep=\magstephalf
1178
  \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1179
  \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1180
\fi
1181
% Instead of cmb10, you many want to use cmbx10.
1182
% cmbx10 is a prettier font on its own, but cmb10
1183
% looks better when embedded in a line with cmr10.
1184
\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1185
\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1186
\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1187
\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1188
\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1189
\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1190
\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
1191
\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
1192
 
1193
% A few fonts for @defun, etc.
1194
\setfont\defbf\bxshape{10}{\magstep1} %was 1314
1195
\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}
1196
\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \bf}
1197
 
1198
% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
1199
\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}
1200
\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}
1201
\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}
1202
\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}
1203
\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}
1204
\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}
1205
\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}
1206
\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}
1207
\font\smalli=cmmi9
1208
\font\smallsy=cmsy9
1209
 
1210
% Fonts for small examples (8pt).
1211
\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}
1212
\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}
1213
\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}
1214
\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}
1215
\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}
1216
\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}
1217
\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}
1218
\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}
1219
\font\smalleri=cmmi8
1220
\font\smallersy=cmsy8
1221
 
1222
% Fonts for title page:
1223
\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}
1224
\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}
1225
\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}
1226
\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}
1227
\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}
1228
\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}
1229
\let\titlebf=\titlerm
1230
\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}
1231
\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
1232
\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
1233
\def\authorrm{\secrm}
1234
 
1235
% Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt).
1236
\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}
1237
\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}
1238
\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}
1239
\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}
1240
\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}
1241
\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}
1242
\let\chapbf=\chaprm
1243
\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}
1244
\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2
1245
\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3
1246
 
1247
% Section fonts (14.4pt).
1248
\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}
1249
\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}
1250
\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}
1251
\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}
1252
\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}
1253
\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}
1254
\let\secbf\secrm
1255
\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}
1256
\font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
1257
\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
1258
 
1259
% Subsection fonts (13.15pt).
1260
\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
1261
\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}
1262
\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}
1263
\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
1264
\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}
1265
\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
1266
\let\ssecbf\ssecrm
1267
\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}
1268
\font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf
1269
\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315
1270
% The smallcaps and symbol fonts should actually be scaled \magstep1.5,
1271
% but that is not a standard magnification.
1272
 
1273
% In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters,
1274
% we have to define the \textfont of the standard families.  Since
1275
% texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts except
1276
% in the main text, we don't bother to reset \scriptfont and
1277
% \scriptscriptfont (which would also require loading a lot more fonts).
1278
%
1279
\def\resetmathfonts{%
1280
  \textfont0=\tenrm \textfont1=\teni \textfont2=\tensy
1281
  \textfont\itfam=\tenit \textfont\slfam=\tensl \textfont\bffam=\tenbf
1282
  \textfont\ttfam=\tentt \textfont\sffam=\tensf
1283
}
1284
 
1285
% The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead
1286
% of just \STYLE.  We do this so that font changes will continue to work
1287
% in math mode, where it is the current \fam that is relevant in most
1288
% cases, not the current font.  Plain TeX does \def\bf{\fam=\bffam
1289
% \tenbf}, for example.  By redefining \tenbf, we obviate the need to
1290
% redefine \bf itself.
1291
\def\textfonts{%
1292
  \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl
1293
  \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc
1294
  \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy \let\tenttsl=\textttsl
1295
  \resetmathfonts \setleading{\textleading}}
1296
\def\titlefonts{%
1297
  \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl
1298
  \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc
1299
  \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy
1300
  \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl
1301
  \resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}}
1302
\def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}}
1303
\def\chapfonts{%
1304
  \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl
1305
  \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc
1306
  \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl
1307
  \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}}
1308
\def\secfonts{%
1309
  \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl
1310
  \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc
1311
  \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy \let\tenttsl=\secttsl
1312
  \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}}
1313
\def\subsecfonts{%
1314
  \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl
1315
  \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc
1316
  \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl
1317
  \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}}
1318
\let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts % Maybe make sssec fonts scaled magstephalf?
1319
\def\smallfonts{%
1320
  \let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl
1321
  \let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc
1322
  \let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy
1323
  \let\tenttsl=\smallttsl
1324
  \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
1325
\def\smallerfonts{%
1326
  \let\tenrm=\smallerrm \let\tenit=\smallerit \let\tensl=\smallersl
1327
  \let\tenbf=\smallerbf \let\tentt=\smallertt \let\smallcaps=\smallersc
1328
  \let\tensf=\smallersf \let\teni=\smalleri \let\tensy=\smallersy
1329
  \let\tenttsl=\smallerttsl
1330
  \resetmathfonts \setleading{9.5pt}}
1331
\let\smallexamplefonts = \smallerfonts
1332
 
1333
% Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes.
1334
%
1335
\textfonts
1336
 
1337
% Define these so they can be easily changed for other fonts.
1338
\def\angleleft{$\langle$}
1339
\def\angleright{$\rangle$}
1340
 
1341
% Count depth in font-changes, for error checks
1342
\newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0
1343
 
1344
% Fonts for short table of contents.
1345
\setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}
1346
\setfont\shortcontbf\bxshape{12}{1000}
1347
\setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}
1348
 
1349
%% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans
1350
%% serif) and @ii for TeX italic
1351
 
1352
% \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction
1353
% unless the following character is such as not to need one.
1354
\def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else\/\fi\fi\fi}
1355
\def\smartslanted#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
1356
\def\smartitalic#1{{\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
1357
 
1358
\let\i=\smartitalic
1359
\let\var=\smartslanted
1360
\let\dfn=\smartslanted
1361
\let\emph=\smartitalic
1362
\let\cite=\smartslanted
1363
 
1364
\def\b#1{{\bf #1}}
1365
\let\strong=\b
1366
 
1367
% We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at
1368
% the end of a paragraph.  Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the
1369
% group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called.
1370
%
1371
\def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1  \aftergroup\restorehyphenation}
1372
\def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- }
1373
 
1374
\def\t#1{%
1375
  {\tt \rawbackslash \frenchspacing #1}%
1376
  \null
1377
}
1378
\let\ttfont=\t
1379
\def\samp#1{`\tclose{#1}'\null}
1380
\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}
1381
\font\keysy=cmsy9
1382
\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{%
1383
  \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{%
1384
    \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt
1385
     \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}%
1386
    \kern-0.4pt\hrule}%
1387
  \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}}
1388
% The old definition, with no lozenge:
1389
%\def\key #1{{\ttsl \nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null}
1390
\def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1}
1391
 
1392
% @file, @option are the same as @samp.
1393
\let\file=\samp
1394
\let\option=\samp
1395
 
1396
% @code is a modification of @t,
1397
% which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text.
1398
\def\tclose#1{%
1399
  {%
1400
    % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font.
1401
    \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font
1402
    %
1403
    % Switch to typewriter.
1404
    \tt
1405
    %
1406
    % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space.
1407
    \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}%
1408
    %
1409
    % Turn off hyphenation.
1410
    \nohyphenation
1411
    %
1412
    \rawbackslash
1413
    \frenchspacing
1414
    #1%
1415
  }%
1416
  \null
1417
}
1418
 
1419
% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in \code.
1420
% Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes
1421
% in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc.
1422
 
1423
% Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control
1424
% both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words.
1425
% We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that)
1426
% and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash.
1427
%  -- rms.
1428
{
1429
  \catcode`\-=\active
1430
  \catcode`\_=\active
1431
  %
1432
  \global\def\code{\begingroup
1433
    \catcode`\-=\active \let-\codedash
1434
    \catcode`\_=\active \let_\codeunder
1435
    \codex
1436
  }
1437
  %
1438
  % If we end up with any active - characters when handling the index,
1439
  % just treat them as a normal -.
1440
  \global\def\indexbreaks{\catcode`\-=\active \let-\realdash}
1441
}
1442
 
1443
\def\realdash{-}
1444
\def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}}
1445
\def\codeunder{%
1446
  % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work.  In math mode, _
1447
  % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.)
1448
  % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us
1449
  % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop.
1450
  \ifusingtt{\ifmmode
1451
               \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_.
1452
             \else\normalunderscore \fi
1453
             \discretionary{}{}{}}%
1454
            {\_}%
1455
}
1456
\def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup}
1457
 
1458
% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command,
1459
% then @kbd has no effect.
1460
 
1461
% @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),
1462
%   `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),
1463
%   or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).
1464
\def\kbdinputstyle{\parsearg\kbdinputstylexxx}
1465
\def\kbdinputstylexxx#1{%
1466
  \def\arg{#1}%
1467
  \ifx\arg\worddistinct
1468
    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}%
1469
  \else\ifx\arg\wordexample
1470
    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
1471
  \else\ifx\arg\wordcode
1472
    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
1473
  \fi\fi\fi
1474
}
1475
\def\worddistinct{distinct}
1476
\def\wordexample{example}
1477
\def\wordcode{code}
1478
 
1479
% Default is kbdinputdistinct.  (Too much of a hassle to call the macro,
1480
% the catcodes are wrong for parsearg to work.)
1481
\gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}
1482
 
1483
\def\xkey{\key}
1484
\def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}%
1485
\ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}%
1486
\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi
1487
\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi}
1488
 
1489
% For @url, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code.
1490
\let\url=\code
1491
\let\env=\code
1492
\let\command=\code
1493
 
1494
% @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated)
1495
% second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third
1496
% arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url
1497
% itself.  First (mandatory) arg is the url.  Perhaps eventually put in
1498
% a hypertex \special here.
1499
%
1500
\def\uref#1{\douref #1,,,\finish}
1501
\def\douref#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup
1502
  \unsepspaces
1503
  \pdfurl{#1}%
1504
  \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
1505
  \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
1506
    \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that
1507
  \else
1508
    \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
1509
    \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
1510
      \ifpdf
1511
        \unhbox0             % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it
1512
      \else
1513
        \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url
1514
      \fi
1515
    \else
1516
      \code{#1}% only url given, so show it
1517
    \fi
1518
  \fi
1519
  \endlink
1520
\endgroup}
1521
 
1522
% rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97.
1523
% So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf.
1524
%
1525
%\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright}
1526
\ifpdf
1527
  \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish}
1528
  \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup
1529
    \unsepspaces
1530
    \pdfurl{mailto:#1}%
1531
    \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
1532
    \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi
1533
    \endlink
1534
  \endgroup}
1535
\else
1536
  \let\email=\uref
1537
\fi
1538
 
1539
% Check if we are currently using a typewriter font.  Since all the
1540
% Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and
1541
% shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have
1542
% this property, we can check that font parameter.
1543
%
1544
\def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt }
1545
 
1546
% Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'.  The only reason for the
1547
% argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt.
1548
%
1549
\def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1}
1550
 
1551
\def\kbd#1{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par}
1552
 
1553
% @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'',
1554
% and it is not used as such in any manual I can find.  We need it for
1555
% Polish suppressed-l.  --karl, 22sep96.
1556
%\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null}
1557
 
1558
% Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii.
1559
\def\r#1{{\rm #1}}              % roman font
1560
\def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}}       % smallcaps font
1561
\def\ii#1{{\it #1}}             % italic font
1562
 
1563
% @acronym downcases the argument and prints in smallcaps.
1564
\def\acronym#1{{\smallcaps \lowercase{#1}}}
1565
 
1566
% @pounds{} is a sterling sign.
1567
\def\pounds{{\it\$}}
1568
 
1569
 
1570
\message{page headings,}
1571
 
1572
\newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in
1573
\newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc
1574
 
1575
% First the title page.  Must do @settitle before @titlepage.
1576
\newif\ifseenauthor
1577
\newif\iffinishedtitlepage
1578
 
1579
% Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the
1580
% user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage.
1581
%
1582
\newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
1583
 \let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
1584
\newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
1585
 \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
1586
 
1587
\def\shorttitlepage{\parsearg\shorttitlepagezzz}
1588
\def\shorttitlepagezzz #1{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
1589
        \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
1590
 
1591
\def\titlepage{\begingroup \parindent=0pt \textfonts
1592
   \let\subtitlerm=\tenrm
1593
   \def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}%
1594
   %
1595
   \def\authorfont{\authorrm \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines}%
1596
   %
1597
   % Leave some space at the very top of the page.
1598
   \vglue\titlepagetopglue
1599
   %
1600
   % Now you can print the title using @title.
1601
   \def\title{\parsearg\titlezzz}%
1602
   \def\titlezzz##1{\leftline{\titlefonts\rm ##1}
1603
                    % print a rule at the page bottom also.
1604
                    \finishedtitlepagefalse
1605
                    \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt}%
1606
   % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
1607
   \finishedtitlepagetrue
1608
   %
1609
   % Now you can put text using @subtitle.
1610
   \def\subtitle{\parsearg\subtitlezzz}%
1611
   \def\subtitlezzz##1{{\subtitlefont \rightline{##1}}}%
1612
   %
1613
   % @author should come last, but may come many times.
1614
   \def\author{\parsearg\authorzzz}%
1615
   \def\authorzzz##1{\ifseenauthor\else\vskip 0pt plus 1filll\seenauthortrue\fi
1616
      {\authorfont \leftline{##1}}}%
1617
   %
1618
   % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
1619
   % at the top of the second.  We don't want the ragged left on the second.
1620
   \let\oldpage = \page
1621
   \def\page{%
1622
      \iffinishedtitlepage\else
1623
         \finishtitlepage
1624
      \fi
1625
      \oldpage
1626
      \let\page = \oldpage
1627
      \hbox{}}%
1628
%   \def\page{\oldpage \hbox{}}
1629
}
1630
 
1631
\def\Etitlepage{%
1632
   \iffinishedtitlepage\else
1633
      \finishtitlepage
1634
   \fi
1635
   % It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
1636
   % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
1637
   % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
1638
   % after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
1639
   \oldpage
1640
   \endgroup
1641
   %
1642
   % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are
1643
   % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers.
1644
   \HEADINGSon
1645
   %
1646
   % If they want short, they certainly want long too.
1647
   \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
1648
     \shortcontents
1649
     \contents
1650
     \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
1651
     \global\let\contents = \relax
1652
   \fi
1653
   %
1654
   \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
1655
     \contents
1656
     \global\let\contents = \relax
1657
     \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
1658
   \fi
1659
}
1660
 
1661
\def\finishtitlepage{%
1662
   \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize
1663
   \vskip\titlepagebottomglue
1664
   \finishedtitlepagetrue
1665
}
1666
 
1667
%%% Set up page headings and footings.
1668
 
1669
\let\thispage=\folio
1670
 
1671
\newtoks\evenheadline    % headline on even pages
1672
\newtoks\oddheadline     % headline on odd pages
1673
\newtoks\evenfootline    % footline on even pages
1674
\newtoks\oddfootline     % footline on odd pages
1675
 
1676
% Now make Tex use those variables
1677
\headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline
1678
                            \else \the\evenheadline \fi}}
1679
\footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline
1680
                            \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook}
1681
\let\HEADINGShook=\relax
1682
 
1683
% Commands to set those variables.
1684
% For example, this is what  @headings on  does
1685
% @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter
1686
% @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle
1687
% @evenfooting @thisfile||
1688
% @oddfooting ||@thisfile
1689
 
1690
\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
1691
\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
1692
\def\everyheading{\parsearg\everyheadingxxx}
1693
 
1694
\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
1695
\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
1696
\def\everyfooting{\parsearg\everyfootingxxx}
1697
 
1698
{\catcode`\@=0 %
1699
 
1700
\gdef\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
1701
\gdef\evenheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
1702
\global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
1703
 
1704
\gdef\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
1705
\gdef\oddheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
1706
\global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
1707
 
1708
\gdef\everyheadingxxx#1{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}%
1709
 
1710
\gdef\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
1711
\gdef\evenfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
1712
\global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
1713
 
1714
\gdef\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
1715
\gdef\oddfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
1716
  \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
1717
  %
1718
  % Leave some space for the footline.  Hopefully ok to assume
1719
  % @evenfooting will not be used by itself.
1720
  \global\advance\pageheight by -\baselineskip
1721
  \global\advance\vsize by -\baselineskip
1722
}
1723
 
1724
\gdef\everyfootingxxx#1{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}}
1725
%
1726
}% unbind the catcode of @.
1727
 
1728
% @headings double      turns headings on for double-sided printing.
1729
% @headings single      turns headings on for single-sided printing.
1730
% @headings off         turns them off.
1731
% @headings on          same as @headings double, retained for compatibility.
1732
% @headings after       turns on double-sided headings after this page.
1733
% @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page.
1734
% @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page.
1735
% By default, they are off at the start of a document,
1736
% and turned `on' after @end titlepage.
1737
 
1738
\def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname}
1739
 
1740
\def\HEADINGSoff{
1741
\global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
1742
\global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}}
1743
\HEADINGSoff
1744
% When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1.
1745
% For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner,
1746
% chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document
1747
% title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top
1748
% edge of all pages.
1749
\def\HEADINGSdouble{
1750
\global\pageno=1
1751
\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
1752
\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
1753
\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
1754
\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
1755
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
1756
}
1757
\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
1758
 
1759
% For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page,
1760
% page number on top right.
1761
\def\HEADINGSsingle{
1762
\global\pageno=1
1763
\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
1764
\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
1765
\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
1766
\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
1767
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
1768
}
1769
\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}
1770
 
1771
\def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex}
1772
\let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter
1773
\def\HEADINGSdoublex{%
1774
\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
1775
\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
1776
\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
1777
\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
1778
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
1779
}
1780
 
1781
\def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex}
1782
\def\HEADINGSsinglex{%
1783
\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
1784
\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
1785
\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
1786
\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
1787
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
1788
}
1789
 
1790
% Subroutines used in generating headings
1791
% This produces Day Month Year style of output.
1792
% Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set
1793
% up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this).
1794
\ifx\today\undefined
1795
\def\today{%
1796
  \number\day\space
1797
  \ifcase\month
1798
  \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr
1799
  \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug
1800
  \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec
1801
  \fi
1802
  \space\number\year}
1803
\fi
1804
 
1805
% @settitle line...  specifies the title of the document, for headings.
1806
% It generates no output of its own.
1807
\def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle}
1808
\def\settitle{\parsearg\settitlezzz}
1809
\def\settitlezzz #1{\gdef\thistitle{#1}}
1810
 
1811
 
1812
\message{tables,}
1813
% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x), @kitem(x), @xitem(x).
1814
 
1815
% default indentation of table text
1816
\newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in
1817
% default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text
1818
\newdimen\itemindent  \itemindent=.3in
1819
% margin between end of table item and start of table text.
1820
\newdimen\itemmargin  \itemmargin=.1in
1821
 
1822
% used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin
1823
\newdimen\itemmax
1824
 
1825
% Note @table, @vtable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
1826
% these defs.
1827
% They also define \itemindex
1828
% to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none).
1829
 
1830
\newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip
1831
 
1832
\def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi}
1833
 
1834
\def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz}
1835
\def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz}
1836
 
1837
\def\internalBxitem "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \smallbreak \parsearg\xitemzzz}
1838
\def\internalBxitemx "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \itemxpar \parsearg\xitemzzz}
1839
 
1840
\def\internalBkitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\kitemzzz}
1841
\def\internalBkitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\kitemzzz}
1842
 
1843
\def\kitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \lastfunction}}%
1844
                 \itemzzz {#1}}
1845
 
1846
\def\xitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \xitemsubtopic}}%
1847
                 \itemzzz {#1}}
1848
 
1849
\def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup %
1850
  \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
1851
  \advance\hsize by -\tableindent
1852
  \setbox0=\hbox{\itemfont{#1}}%
1853
  \itemindex{#1}%
1854
  \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx.
1855
  %
1856
  % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line
1857
  % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that
1858
  % line.  We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next
1859
  % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the
1860
  % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space.
1861
  \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax
1862
    %
1863
    % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping,
1864
    % but leave it ragged-right.
1865
    \begingroup
1866
      \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent
1867
      \advance\hsize by\tableindent
1868
      \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil
1869
      \leavevmode\unhbox0\par
1870
    \endgroup
1871
    %
1872
    % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the
1873
    % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started.
1874
    \nobreak \vskip-\parskip
1875
    %
1876
    % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up.  Unfortunately
1877
    % we can't prevent a possible page break at the following
1878
    % \baselineskip glue.
1879
    \nobreak
1880
    \endgroup
1881
    \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse
1882
  \else
1883
    % The item text fits into the space.  Start a paragraph, so that the
1884
    % following text (if any) will end up on the same line.
1885
    \noindent
1886
    % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in
1887
    % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and
1888
    % eventually be printed.
1889
    \nobreak\kern-\tableindent
1890
    \dimen0 = \itemmax  \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0
1891
    \unhbox0
1892
    \nobreak\kern\dimen0
1893
    \endgroup
1894
    \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue
1895
  \fi
1896
}
1897
 
1898
\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a table}}
1899
\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a table}}
1900
\def\kitem{\errmessage{@kitem while not in a table}}
1901
\def\kitemx{\errmessage{@kitemx while not in a table}}
1902
\def\xitem{\errmessage{@xitem while not in a table}}
1903
\def\xitemx{\errmessage{@xitemx while not in a table}}
1904
 
1905
% Contains a kludge to get @end[description] to work.
1906
\def\description{\tablez{\dontindex}{1}{}{}{}{}}
1907
 
1908
% @table, @ftable, @vtable.
1909
\def\table{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\tablex}
1910
{\obeylines\obeyspaces%
1911
\gdef\tablex #1^^M{%
1912
\tabley\dontindex#1        \endtabley}}
1913
 
1914
\def\ftable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\ftablex}
1915
{\obeylines\obeyspaces%
1916
\gdef\ftablex #1^^M{%
1917
\tabley\fnitemindex#1        \endtabley
1918
\def\Eftable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
1919
\let\Etable=\relax}}
1920
 
1921
\def\vtable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\vtablex}
1922
{\obeylines\obeyspaces%
1923
\gdef\vtablex #1^^M{%
1924
\tabley\vritemindex#1        \endtabley
1925
\def\Evtable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
1926
\let\Etable=\relax}}
1927
 
1928
\def\dontindex #1{}
1929
\def\fnitemindex #1{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}}%
1930
\def\vritemindex #1{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}}%
1931
 
1932
{\obeyspaces %
1933
\gdef\tabley#1#2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7\endtabley{\endgroup%
1934
\tablez{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}}
1935
 
1936
\def\tablez #1#2#3#4#5#6{%
1937
\aboveenvbreak %
1938
\begingroup %
1939
\def\Edescription{\Etable}% Necessary kludge.
1940
\let\itemindex=#1%
1941
\ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \leftskip by #3\mil \fi %
1942
\ifnum 0#4>0 \tableindent=#4\mil \fi %
1943
\ifnum 0#5>0 \advance \rightskip by #5\mil \fi %
1944
\def\itemfont{#2}%
1945
\itemmax=\tableindent %
1946
\advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin %
1947
\advance \leftskip by \tableindent %
1948
\exdentamount=\tableindent
1949
\parindent = 0pt
1950
\parskip = \smallskipamount
1951
\ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi%
1952
\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
1953
\let\item = \internalBitem %
1954
\let\itemx = \internalBitemx %
1955
\let\kitem = \internalBkitem %
1956
\let\kitemx = \internalBkitemx %
1957
\let\xitem = \internalBxitem %
1958
\let\xitemx = \internalBxitemx %
1959
}
1960
 
1961
% This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize
1962
 
1963
\newcount \itemno
1964
 
1965
\def\itemize{\parsearg\itemizezzz}
1966
 
1967
\def\itemizezzz #1{%
1968
  \begingroup % ended by the @end itemize
1969
  \itemizey {#1}{\Eitemize}
1970
}
1971
 
1972
\def\itemizey #1#2{%
1973
\aboveenvbreak %
1974
\itemmax=\itemindent %
1975
\advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin %
1976
\advance \leftskip by \itemindent %
1977
\exdentamount=\itemindent
1978
\parindent = 0pt %
1979
\parskip = \smallskipamount %
1980
\ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi%
1981
\def#2{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
1982
\def\itemcontents{#1}%
1983
\let\item=\itemizeitem}
1984
 
1985
% Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value.
1986
% These are `.?!:;,'
1987
\def\frenchspacing{\sfcode46=1000 \sfcode63=1000 \sfcode33=1000
1988
  \sfcode58=1000 \sfcode59=1000 \sfcode44=1000 }
1989
 
1990
% \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in
1991
% TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder.
1992
%
1993
\def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}%
1994
 
1995
% Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter,
1996
% or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list.  No
1997
% argument is the same as `1'.
1998
%
1999
\def\enumerate{\parsearg\enumeratezzz}
2000
\def\enumeratezzz #1{\enumeratey #1  \endenumeratey}
2001
\def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{%
2002
  \begingroup % ended by the @end enumerate
2003
  %
2004
  % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'.
2005
  \def\thearg{#1}%
2006
  \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi
2007
  %
2008
  % Detect if the argument is a single token.  If so, it might be a
2009
  % letter.  Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number.
2010
  % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made.
2011
  % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at
2012
  % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.)
2013
  \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark
2014
  \ifx\rest\empty
2015
    % Only one token in the argument.  It could still be anything.
2016
    % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero.
2017
    % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and
2018
    %   not equal to itself.
2019
    % Otherwise, we assume it's a number.
2020
    %
2021
    % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from
2022
    % continuing to look for a <number>.
2023
    %
2024
    \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax
2025
      \numericenumerate % a number (we hope)
2026
    \else
2027
      % It's a letter.
2028
      \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax
2029
        \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter
2030
      \else
2031
        \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter
2032
      \fi
2033
    \fi
2034
  \else
2035
    % Multiple tokens in the argument.  We hope it's a number.
2036
    \numericenumerate
2037
  \fi
2038
}
2039
 
2040
% An @enumerate whose labels are integers.  The starting integer is
2041
% given in \thearg.
2042
%
2043
\def\numericenumerate{%
2044
  \itemno = \thearg
2045
  \startenumeration{\the\itemno}%
2046
}
2047
 
2048
% The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg.
2049
\def\lowercaseenumerate{%
2050
  \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
2051
  \startenumeration{%
2052
    % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
2053
    \ifnum\itemno=0
2054
      \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
2055
                  alphabet}%
2056
    \fi
2057
    \char\lccode\itemno
2058
  }%
2059
}
2060
 
2061
% The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg.
2062
\def\uppercaseenumerate{%
2063
  \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
2064
  \startenumeration{%
2065
    % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
2066
    \ifnum\itemno=0
2067
      \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
2068
                  alphabet}
2069
    \fi
2070
    \char\uccode\itemno
2071
  }%
2072
}
2073
 
2074
% Call itemizey, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
2075
% common last two arguments.  Also subtract one from the initial value in
2076
% \itemno, since @item increments \itemno.
2077
%
2078
\def\startenumeration#1{%
2079
  \advance\itemno by -1
2080
  \itemizey{#1.}\Eenumerate\flushcr
2081
}
2082
 
2083
% @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg
2084
% to @enumerate.
2085
%
2086
\def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}}
2087
\def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}}
2088
\def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate}
2089
\def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate}
2090
 
2091
% Definition of @item while inside @itemize.
2092
 
2093
\def\itemizeitem{%
2094
\advance\itemno by 1
2095
{\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}%
2096
\ifhmode \errmessage{In hmode at itemizeitem}\fi
2097
{\parskip=0in \hskip 0pt
2098
\hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents\hskip \itemmargin}%
2099
\vadjust{\penalty 1200}}%
2100
\flushcr}
2101
 
2102
% @multitable macros
2103
% Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96
2104
%
2105
% @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired.
2106
% Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble.  Width
2107
% can be specified either with sample text given in a template line,
2108
% or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page.
2109
 
2110
% Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines.
2111
 
2112
% To make preamble:
2113
%
2114
% Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize:
2115
%   @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45
2116
%   @item ...
2117
%
2118
%   Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total
2119
%   current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many
2120
%   columns as desired.
2121
 
2122
 
2123
% Or use a template:
2124
%   @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
2125
%   @item ...
2126
%   using the widest term desired in each column.
2127
%
2128
% For those who want to use more than one line's worth of words in
2129
% the preamble, break the line within one argument and it
2130
% will parse correctly, i.e.,
2131
%
2132
%     @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3
2133
%      template}
2134
% Not:
2135
%     @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template}
2136
%      {Column 3 template}
2137
 
2138
% Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column
2139
% starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's
2140
% with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed,
2141
% ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns.
2142
 
2143
% @item, @tab, @multitable or @end multitable do not need to be on their
2144
% own lines, but it will not hurt if they are.
2145
 
2146
% Sample multitable:
2147
 
2148
%   @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
2149
%   @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col
2150
%   @item
2151
%   first col stuff
2152
%   @tab
2153
%   second col stuff
2154
%   @tab
2155
%   third col
2156
%   @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff
2157
%   @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column.
2158
%
2159
%         They will wrap at the width determined by the template.
2160
%   @item@tab@tab This will be in third column.
2161
%   @end multitable
2162
 
2163
% Default dimensions may be reset by user.
2164
% @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table.
2165
% @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table.
2166
% @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns.
2167
% @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline
2168
%                                                            to baseline.
2169
%   0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing.
2170
%
2171
\newskip\multitableparskip
2172
\newskip\multitableparindent
2173
\newdimen\multitablecolspace
2174
\newskip\multitablelinespace
2175
\multitableparskip=0pt
2176
\multitableparindent=6pt
2177
\multitablecolspace=12pt
2178
\multitablelinespace=0pt
2179
 
2180
% Macros used to set up halign preamble:
2181
%
2182
\let\endsetuptable\relax
2183
\def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable}
2184
\let\columnfractions\relax
2185
\def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions}
2186
\newif\ifsetpercent
2187
 
2188
% #1 is the part of the @columnfraction before the decimal point, which
2189
% is presumably either 0 or the empty string (but we don't check, we
2190
% just throw it away).  #2 is the decimal part, which we use as the
2191
% percent of \hsize for this column.
2192
\def\pickupwholefraction#1.#2 {%
2193
  \global\advance\colcount by 1
2194
  \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{.#2\hsize}%
2195
  \setuptable
2196
}
2197
 
2198
\newcount\colcount
2199
\def\setuptable#1{%
2200
  \def\firstarg{#1}%
2201
  \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable
2202
    \let\go = \relax
2203
  \else
2204
    \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions
2205
      \global\setpercenttrue
2206
    \else
2207
      \ifsetpercent
2208
         \let\go\pickupwholefraction
2209
      \else
2210
         \global\advance\colcount by 1
2211
         \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip }% Add a normal word space as a separator;
2212
                            % typically that is always in the input, anyway.
2213
         \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}%
2214
      \fi
2215
    \fi
2216
    \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction
2217
      % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so
2218
      % we'll always have a period there to be parsed.
2219
      \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}%
2220
    \else
2221
      \let\go = \setuptable
2222
    \fi%
2223
  \fi
2224
  \go
2225
}
2226
 
2227
% This used to have \hskip1sp.  But then the space in a template line is
2228
% not enough.  That is bad.  So let's go back to just & until we
2229
% encounter the problem it was intended to solve again.
2230
% --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99.
2231
\def\tab{&}
2232
 
2233
% @multitable ... @end multitable definitions:
2234
%
2235
\def\multitable{\parsearg\dotable}
2236
\def\dotable#1{\bgroup
2237
  \vskip\parskip
2238
  \let\item\crcr
2239
  \tolerance=9500
2240
  \hbadness=9500
2241
  \setmultitablespacing
2242
  \parskip=\multitableparskip
2243
  \parindent=\multitableparindent
2244
  \overfullrule=0pt
2245
  \global\colcount=0
2246
  \def\Emultitable{\global\setpercentfalse\cr\egroup\egroup}%
2247
  %
2248
  % To parse everything between @multitable and @item:
2249
  \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable
2250
  %
2251
  % \everycr will reset column counter, \colcount, at the end of
2252
  % each line. Every column entry will cause \colcount to advance by one.
2253
  % The table preamble
2254
  % looks at the current \colcount to find the correct column width.
2255
  \everycr{\noalign{%
2256
  %
2257
  % \filbreak%% keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages.
2258
  % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the table
2259
  % breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better?  Wait until the problem
2260
  % manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl.
2261
    \global\colcount=0\relax}}%
2262
  %
2263
  % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will
2264
  % be used as many times as user calls for columns.
2265
  % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and
2266
  % continue for many paragraphs if desired.
2267
  \halign\bgroup&\global\advance\colcount by 1\relax
2268
    \multistrut\vtop{\hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname
2269
  %
2270
  % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other
2271
  % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after
2272
  % the first one.
2273
  %
2274
  % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace
2275
  % to the width of each template entry.
2276
  %
2277
  % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will
2278
  % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip
2279
  % will keep entries from bumping into each other.  Table will start at
2280
  % left margin and final column will justify at right margin.
2281
  %
2282
  % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment.
2283
  \rightskip=0pt
2284
  \ifnum\colcount=1
2285
    % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text.
2286
    \advance\hsize by\leftskip
2287
  \else
2288
    \ifsetpercent \else
2289
      % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize
2290
      % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace.
2291
      \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace
2292
    \fi
2293
   % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace:
2294
  \leftskip=\multitablecolspace
2295
  \fi
2296
  % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious
2297
  % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the
2298
  % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself.
2299
  % For example:
2300
  % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89
2301
  % @item @code{#}
2302
  % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country.
2303
  % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively marking
2304
  % characters.
2305
  \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut}\cr
2306
}
2307
 
2308
\def\setmultitablespacing{% test to see if user has set \multitablelinespace.
2309
% If so, do nothing. If not, give it an appropriate dimension based on
2310
% current baselineskip.
2311
\ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt
2312
\setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip
2313
\global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0
2314
%% strut to put in table in case some entry doesn't have descenders,
2315
%% to keep lines equally spaced
2316
\let\multistrut = \strut
2317
\else
2318
%% FIXME: what is \box0 supposed to be?
2319
\gdef\multistrut{\vrule height\multitablelinespace depth\dp0
2320
width0pt\relax} \fi
2321
%% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of
2322
%% table. If not, do nothing.
2323
%%        If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace.
2324
\ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace
2325
\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
2326
\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
2327
                                      %% than skip between lines in the table.
2328
\fi%
2329
\ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt
2330
\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
2331
\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
2332
                                      %% than skip between lines in the table.
2333
\fi}
2334
 
2335
 
2336
\message{conditionals,}
2337
% Prevent errors for section commands.
2338
% Used in @ignore and in failing conditionals.
2339
\def\ignoresections{%
2340
  \let\chapter=\relax
2341
  \let\unnumbered=\relax
2342
  \let\top=\relax
2343
  \let\unnumberedsec=\relax
2344
  \let\unnumberedsection=\relax
2345
  \let\unnumberedsubsec=\relax
2346
  \let\unnumberedsubsection=\relax
2347
  \let\unnumberedsubsubsec=\relax
2348
  \let\unnumberedsubsubsection=\relax
2349
  \let\section=\relax
2350
  \let\subsec=\relax
2351
  \let\subsubsec=\relax
2352
  \let\subsection=\relax
2353
  \let\subsubsection=\relax
2354
  \let\appendix=\relax
2355
  \let\appendixsec=\relax
2356
  \let\appendixsection=\relax
2357
  \let\appendixsubsec=\relax
2358
  \let\appendixsubsection=\relax
2359
  \let\appendixsubsubsec=\relax
2360
  \let\appendixsubsubsection=\relax
2361
  \let\contents=\relax
2362
  \let\smallbook=\relax
2363
  \let\titlepage=\relax
2364
}
2365
 
2366
% Used in nested conditionals, where we have to parse the Texinfo source
2367
% and so want to turn off most commands, in case they are used
2368
% incorrectly.
2369
%
2370
\def\ignoremorecommands{%
2371
  \let\defcodeindex = \relax
2372
  \let\defcv = \relax
2373
  \let\deffn = \relax
2374
  \let\deffnx = \relax
2375
  \let\defindex = \relax
2376
  \let\defivar = \relax
2377
  \let\defmac = \relax
2378
  \let\defmethod = \relax
2379
  \let\defop = \relax
2380
  \let\defopt = \relax
2381
  \let\defspec = \relax
2382
  \let\deftp = \relax
2383
  \let\deftypefn = \relax
2384
  \let\deftypefun = \relax
2385
  \let\deftypeivar = \relax
2386
  \let\deftypeop = \relax
2387
  \let\deftypevar = \relax
2388
  \let\deftypevr = \relax
2389
  \let\defun = \relax
2390
  \let\defvar = \relax
2391
  \let\defvr = \relax
2392
  \let\ref = \relax
2393
  \let\xref = \relax
2394
  \let\printindex = \relax
2395
  \let\pxref = \relax
2396
  \let\settitle = \relax
2397
  \let\setchapternewpage = \relax
2398
  \let\setchapterstyle = \relax
2399
  \let\everyheading = \relax
2400
  \let\evenheading = \relax
2401
  \let\oddheading = \relax
2402
  \let\everyfooting = \relax
2403
  \let\evenfooting = \relax
2404
  \let\oddfooting = \relax
2405
  \let\headings = \relax
2406
  \let\include = \relax
2407
  \let\lowersections = \relax
2408
  \let\down = \relax
2409
  \let\raisesections = \relax
2410
  \let\up = \relax
2411
  \let\set = \relax
2412
  \let\clear = \relax
2413
  \let\item = \relax
2414
}
2415
 
2416
% Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, @ifplaintext, @ifnottex, @html, @menu,
2417
% @direntry, and @documentdescription.
2418
%
2419
\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}}
2420
\def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}}
2421
\def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}}
2422
\def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}}
2423
\def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}}
2424
\def\html{\doignore{html}}
2425
\def\menu{\doignore{menu}}
2426
\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}}
2427
\def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}}
2428
\def\documentdescriptionword{documentdescription}
2429
 
2430
% @dircategory CATEGORY  -- specify a category of the dir file
2431
% which this file should belong to.  Ignore this in TeX.
2432
\let\dircategory = \comment
2433
 
2434
% Ignore text until a line `@end #1'.
2435
%
2436
\def\doignore#1{\begingroup
2437
  % Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer.
2438
  \ignoresections
2439
  %
2440
  % Define a command to swallow text until we reach `@end #1'.
2441
  % This @ is a catcode 12 token (that is the normal catcode of @ in
2442
  % this texinfo.tex file).  We change the catcode of @ below to match.
2443
  \long\def\doignoretext##1@end #1{\enddoignore}%
2444
  %
2445
  % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants.
2446
  \catcode32 = 10
2447
  %
2448
  % Ignore braces, too, so mismatched braces don't cause trouble.
2449
  \catcode`\{ = 9
2450
  \catcode`\} = 9
2451
  %
2452
  % We must not have @c interpreted as a control sequence.
2453
  \catcode`\@ = 12
2454
  %
2455
  \def\ignoreword{#1}%
2456
  \ifx\ignoreword\documentdescriptionword
2457
    % The c kludge breaks documentdescription, since
2458
    % `documentdescription' contains a `c'.  Means not everything will
2459
    % be ignored inside @documentdescription, but oh well...
2460
  \else
2461
    % Make the letter c a comment character so that the rest of the line
2462
    % will be ignored. This way, the document can have (for example)
2463
    %   @c @end ifinfo
2464
    % and the @end ifinfo will be properly ignored.
2465
    % (We've just changed @ to catcode 12.)
2466
    \catcode`\c = 14
2467
  \fi
2468
  %
2469
  % And now expand the command defined above.
2470
  \doignoretext
2471
}
2472
 
2473
% What we do to finish off ignored text.
2474
%
2475
\def\enddoignore{\endgroup\ignorespaces}%
2476
 
2477
\newif\ifwarnedobs\warnedobsfalse
2478
\def\obstexwarn{%
2479
  \ifwarnedobs\relax\else
2480
  % We need to warn folks that they may have trouble with TeX 3.0.
2481
  % This uses \immediate\write16 rather than \message to get newlines.
2482
    \immediate\write16{}
2483
    \immediate\write16{WARNING: for users of Unix TeX 3.0!}
2484
    \immediate\write16{This manual trips a bug in TeX version 3.0 (tex hangs).}
2485
    \immediate\write16{If you are running another version of TeX, relax.}
2486
    \immediate\write16{If you are running Unix TeX 3.0, kill this TeX process.}
2487
    \immediate\write16{  Then upgrade your TeX installation if you can.}
2488
    \immediate\write16{  (See ftp://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/TeX.README.)}
2489
    \immediate\write16{If you are stuck with version 3.0, run the}
2490
    \immediate\write16{  script ``tex3patch'' from the Texinfo distribution}
2491
    \immediate\write16{  to use a workaround.}
2492
    \immediate\write16{}
2493
    \global\warnedobstrue
2494
    \fi
2495
}
2496
 
2497
% **In TeX 3.0, setting text in \nullfont hangs tex.  For a
2498
% workaround (which requires the file ``dummy.tfm'' to be installed),
2499
% uncomment the following line:
2500
%%%%%\font\nullfont=dummy\let\obstexwarn=\relax
2501
 
2502
% Ignore text, except that we keep track of conditional commands for
2503
% purposes of nesting, up to an `@end #1' command.
2504
%
2505
\def\nestedignore#1{%
2506
  \obstexwarn
2507
  % We must actually expand the ignored text to look for the @end
2508
  % command, so that nested ignore constructs work.  Thus, we put the
2509
  % text into a \vbox and then do nothing with the result.  To minimize
2510
  % the change of memory overflow, we follow the approach outlined on
2511
  % page 401 of the TeXbook: make the current font be a dummy font.
2512
  %
2513
  \setbox0 = \vbox\bgroup
2514
    % Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer.
2515
    \ignoresections
2516
    %
2517
    % Define `@end #1' to end the box, which will in turn undefine the
2518
    % @end command again.
2519
    \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\egroup\ignorespaces}%
2520
    %
2521
    % We are going to be parsing Texinfo commands.  Most cause no
2522
    % trouble when they are used incorrectly, but some commands do
2523
    % complicated argument parsing or otherwise get confused, so we
2524
    % undefine them.
2525
    %
2526
    % We can't do anything about stray @-signs, unfortunately;
2527
    % they'll produce `undefined control sequence' errors.
2528
    \ignoremorecommands
2529
    %
2530
    % Set the current font to be \nullfont, a TeX primitive, and define
2531
    % all the font commands to also use \nullfont.  We don't use
2532
    % dummy.tfm, as suggested in the TeXbook, because not all sites
2533
    % might have that installed.  Therefore, math mode will still
2534
    % produce output, but that should be an extremely small amount of
2535
    % stuff compared to the main input.
2536
    %
2537
    \nullfont
2538
    \let\tenrm=\nullfont \let\tenit=\nullfont \let\tensl=\nullfont
2539
    \let\tenbf=\nullfont \let\tentt=\nullfont \let\smallcaps=\nullfont
2540
    \let\tensf=\nullfont
2541
    % Similarly for index fonts.
2542
    \let\smallrm=\nullfont \let\smallit=\nullfont \let\smallsl=\nullfont
2543
    \let\smallbf=\nullfont \let\smalltt=\nullfont \let\smallsc=\nullfont
2544
    \let\smallsf=\nullfont
2545
    % Similarly for smallexample fonts.
2546
    \let\smallerrm=\nullfont \let\smallerit=\nullfont \let\smallersl=\nullfont
2547
    \let\smallerbf=\nullfont \let\smallertt=\nullfont \let\smallersc=\nullfont
2548
    \let\smallersf=\nullfont
2549
    %
2550
    % Don't complain when characters are missing from the fonts.
2551
    \tracinglostchars = 0
2552
    %
2553
    % Don't bother to do space factor calculations.
2554
    \frenchspacing
2555
    %
2556
    % Don't report underfull hboxes.
2557
    \hbadness = 10000
2558
    %
2559
    % Do minimal line-breaking.
2560
    \pretolerance = 10000
2561
    %
2562
    % Do not execute instructions in @tex
2563
    \def\tex{\doignore{tex}}%
2564
    % Do not execute macro definitions.
2565
    % `c' is a comment character, so the word `macro' will get cut off.
2566
    \def\macro{\doignore{ma}}%
2567
}
2568
 
2569
% @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value.
2570
% @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE.
2571
%
2572
% Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be
2573
% empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our
2574
% own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we
2575
% didn't need it.  Make sure the catcode of space is correct to avoid
2576
% losing inside @example, for instance.
2577
%
2578
\def\set{\begingroup\catcode` =10
2579
  \catcode`\-=12 \catcode`\_=12 % Allow - and _ in VAR.
2580
  \parsearg\setxxx}
2581
\def\setxxx#1{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
2582
\def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{%
2583
  \def\temp{#2}%
2584
  \ifx\temp\empty \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname = \empty
2585
  \else \setzzz{#1}#2\endsetzzz % Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
2586
  \fi
2587
  \endgroup
2588
}
2589
% Can't use \xdef to pre-expand #2 and save some time, since \temp or
2590
% \next or other control sequences that we've defined might get us into
2591
% an infinite loop. Consider `@set foo @cite{bar}'.
2592
\def\setzzz#1#2 \endsetzzz{\expandafter\gdef\csname SET#1\endcsname{#2}}
2593
 
2594
% @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR.
2595
%
2596
\def\clear{\parsearg\clearxxx}
2597
\def\clearxxx#1{\global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax}
2598
 
2599
% @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo.
2600
{
2601
  \catcode`\_ = \active
2602
  %
2603
  % We might end up with active _ or - characters in the argument if
2604
  % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}.  So \let any
2605
  % such active characters to their normal equivalents.
2606
  \gdef\value{\begingroup
2607
    \catcode`\-=12 \catcode`\_=12
2608
    \indexbreaks \let_\normalunderscore
2609
    \valuexxx}
2610
}
2611
\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup}
2612
 
2613
% We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's
2614
% properly in indexes (we \let\value to this in \indexdummies).  Ones
2615
% whose names contain - or _ still won't work, but we can't do anything
2616
% about that.  The command has to be fully expandable, since the result
2617
% winds up in the index file.  This means that if the variable's value
2618
% contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain it will fail
2619
% (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work to do a
2620
% one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete).
2621
%
2622
\def\expandablevalue#1{%
2623
  \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
2624
    {[No value for ``#1'']}%
2625
  \else
2626
    \csname SET#1\endcsname
2627
  \fi
2628
}
2629
 
2630
% @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined
2631
% with @set.
2632
%
2633
\def\ifset{\parsearg\ifsetxxx}
2634
\def\ifsetxxx #1{%
2635
  \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
2636
    \expandafter\ifsetfail
2637
  \else
2638
    \expandafter\ifsetsucceed
2639
  \fi
2640
}
2641
\def\ifsetsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifset}}
2642
\def\ifsetfail{\nestedignore{ifset}}
2643
\defineunmatchedend{ifset}
2644
 
2645
% @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been
2646
% defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear.
2647
%
2648
\def\ifclear{\parsearg\ifclearxxx}
2649
\def\ifclearxxx #1{%
2650
  \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
2651
    \expandafter\ifclearsucceed
2652
  \else
2653
    \expandafter\ifclearfail
2654
  \fi
2655
}
2656
\def\ifclearsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifclear}}
2657
\def\ifclearfail{\nestedignore{ifclear}}
2658
\defineunmatchedend{ifclear}
2659
 
2660
% @iftex, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext always succeed; we
2661
% read the text following, through the first @end iftex (etc.).  Make
2662
% `@end iftex' (etc.) valid only after an @iftex.
2663
%
2664
\def\iftex{\conditionalsucceed{iftex}}
2665
\def\ifnothtml{\conditionalsucceed{ifnothtml}}
2666
\def\ifnotinfo{\conditionalsucceed{ifnotinfo}}
2667
\def\ifnotplaintext{\conditionalsucceed{ifnotplaintext}}
2668
\defineunmatchedend{iftex}
2669
\defineunmatchedend{ifnothtml}
2670
\defineunmatchedend{ifnotinfo}
2671
\defineunmatchedend{ifnotplaintext}
2672
 
2673
% We can't just want to start a group at @iftex (etc.) and end it at
2674
% @end iftex, since then @set commands inside the conditional have no
2675
% effect (they'd get reverted at the end of the group).  So we must
2676
% define \Eiftex to redefine itself to be its previous value.  (We can't
2677
% just define it to fail again with an ``unmatched end'' error, since
2678
% the @ifset might be nested.)
2679
%
2680
\def\conditionalsucceed#1{%
2681
  \edef\temp{%
2682
    % Remember the current value of \E#1.
2683
    \let\nece{prevE#1} = \nece{E#1}%
2684
    %
2685
    % At the `@end #1', redefine \E#1 to be its previous value.
2686
    \def\nece{E#1}{\let\nece{E#1} = \nece{prevE#1}}%
2687
  }%
2688
  \temp
2689
}
2690
 
2691
% We need to expand lots of \csname's, but we don't want to expand the
2692
% control sequences after we've constructed them.
2693
%
2694
\def\nece#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}
2695
 
2696
% @defininfoenclose.
2697
\let\definfoenclose=\comment
2698
 
2699
 
2700
\message{indexing,}
2701
% Index generation facilities
2702
 
2703
% Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite
2704
% except not \outer, so it can be used within \newindex.
2705
{\catcode`\@=11
2706
\gdef\newwrite{\alloc@7\write\chardef\sixt@@n}}
2707
 
2708
% \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo.
2709
% It automatically defines \fooindex such that
2710
% \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo.
2711
% It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for
2712
% the file that accumulates this index.  The file's extension is foo.
2713
% The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long
2714
% for the sake of vms.
2715
%
2716
\def\newindex#1{%
2717
  \iflinks
2718
    \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
2719
    \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file
2720
  \fi
2721
  \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%     % Define @#1index
2722
    \noexpand\doindex{#1}}
2723
}
2724
 
2725
% @defindex foo  ==  \newindex{foo}
2726
%
2727
\def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex}
2728
 
2729
% Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code.
2730
%
2731
\def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex}
2732
%
2733
\def\newcodeindex#1{%
2734
  \iflinks
2735
    \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
2736
    \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1
2737
  \fi
2738
  \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%
2739
    \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}%
2740
}
2741
 
2742
 
2743
% @synindex foo bar    makes index foo feed into index bar.
2744
% Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index.
2745
%
2746
% @syncodeindex foo bar   similar, but put all entries made for index foo
2747
% inside @code.
2748
%
2749
\def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}}
2750
\def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}}
2751
 
2752
% #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo),
2753
% #3 the target index (bar).
2754
\def\dosynindex#1#2#3{%
2755
  % Only do \closeout if we haven't already done it, else we'll end up
2756
  % closing the target index.
2757
  \expandafter \ifx\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname \undefined
2758
    % The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the
2759
    % Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files.
2760
    \expandafter\closeout\csname#2indfile\endcsname
2761
    \expandafter\let\csname\donesynindex#2\endcsname = 1
2762
  \fi
2763
  % redefine \fooindfile:
2764
  \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname
2765
  \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp
2766
  % redefine \fooindex:
2767
  \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}%
2768
}
2769
 
2770
% Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros.
2771
% Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro,
2772
%  and it is "foo", the name of the index.
2773
 
2774
% \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work.
2775
% This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros.
2776
 
2777
% There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic}
2778
% which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index.
2779
 
2780
\def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer}
2781
\def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}}
2782
 
2783
% like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument.
2784
\def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer}
2785
\def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}}
2786
 
2787
% Take care of texinfo commands likely to appear in an index entry.
2788
% (Must be a way to avoid doing expansion at all, and thus not have to
2789
% laboriously list every single command here.)
2790
%
2791
\def\indexdummies{%
2792
\def\ { }%
2793
\def\@{@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in aux files.
2794
% Need these in case \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again.
2795
% But can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes
2796
% braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters.
2797
\let\{ = \mylbrace
2798
\let\} = \myrbrace
2799
\def\_{{\realbackslash _}}%
2800
\normalturnoffactive
2801
%
2802
% Take care of the plain tex accent commands.
2803
\def\,##1{\realbackslash ,{##1}}%
2804
\def\"{\realbackslash "}%
2805
\def\`{\realbackslash `}%
2806
\def\'{\realbackslash '}%
2807
\def\^{\realbackslash ^}%
2808
\def\~{\realbackslash ~}%
2809
\def\={\realbackslash =}%
2810
\def\b{\realbackslash b}%
2811
\def\c{\realbackslash c}%
2812
\def\d{\realbackslash d}%
2813
\def\u{\realbackslash u}%
2814
\def\v{\realbackslash v}%
2815
\def\H{\realbackslash H}%
2816
\def\dotless##1{\realbackslash dotless {##1}}%
2817
% Take care of the plain tex special European modified letters.
2818
\def\AA{\realbackslash AA}%
2819
\def\AE{\realbackslash AE}%
2820
\def\L{\realbackslash L}%
2821
\def\OE{\realbackslash OE}%
2822
\def\O{\realbackslash O}%
2823
\def\aa{\realbackslash aa}%
2824
\def\ae{\realbackslash ae}%
2825
\def\l{\realbackslash l}%
2826
\def\oe{\realbackslash oe}%
2827
\def\o{\realbackslash o}%
2828
\def\ss{\realbackslash ss}%
2829
%
2830
% Although these internals commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do.
2831
\def\bf{\realbackslash bf }%
2832
\def\gtr{\realbackslash gtr}%
2833
\def\hat{\realbackslash hat}%
2834
\def\less{\realbackslash less}%
2835
%\def\rm{\realbackslash rm }%
2836
\def\sf{\realbackslash sf}%
2837
\def\sl{\realbackslash sl }%
2838
\def\tclose##1{\realbackslash tclose {##1}}%
2839
\def\tt{\realbackslash tt}%
2840
%
2841
\def\b##1{\realbackslash b {##1}}%
2842
\def\i##1{\realbackslash i {##1}}%
2843
\def\sc##1{\realbackslash sc {##1}}%
2844
\def\t##1{\realbackslash t {##1}}%
2845
\def\r##1{\realbackslash r {##1}}%
2846
%
2847
\def\TeX{\realbackslash TeX}%
2848
\def\acronym##1{\realbackslash acronym {##1}}%
2849
\def\cite##1{\realbackslash cite {##1}}%
2850
\def\code##1{\realbackslash code {##1}}%
2851
\def\command##1{\realbackslash command {##1}}%
2852
\def\dfn##1{\realbackslash dfn {##1}}%
2853
\def\dots{\realbackslash dots }%
2854
\def\emph##1{\realbackslash emph {##1}}%
2855
\def\env##1{\realbackslash env {##1}}%
2856
\def\file##1{\realbackslash file {##1}}%
2857
\def\kbd##1{\realbackslash kbd {##1}}%
2858
\def\key##1{\realbackslash key {##1}}%
2859
\def\math##1{\realbackslash math {##1}}%
2860
\def\option##1{\realbackslash option {##1}}%
2861
\def\samp##1{\realbackslash samp {##1}}%
2862
\def\strong##1{\realbackslash strong {##1}}%
2863
\def\uref##1{\realbackslash uref {##1}}%
2864
\def\url##1{\realbackslash url {##1}}%
2865
\def\var##1{\realbackslash var {##1}}%
2866
\def\w{\realbackslash w }%
2867
%
2868
% These math commands don't seem likely to be used in index entries.
2869
\def\copyright{\realbackslash copyright}%
2870
\def\equiv{\realbackslash equiv}%
2871
\def\error{\realbackslash error}%
2872
\def\expansion{\realbackslash expansion}%
2873
\def\point{\realbackslash point}%
2874
\def\print{\realbackslash print}%
2875
\def\result{\realbackslash result}%
2876
%
2877
% Handle some cases of @value -- where the variable name does not
2878
% contain - or _, and the value does not contain any
2879
% (non-fully-expandable) commands.
2880
\let\value = \expandablevalue
2881
%
2882
\unsepspaces
2883
% Turn off macro expansion
2884
\turnoffmacros
2885
}
2886
 
2887
% If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
2888
% therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
2889
% expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).
2890
{\obeyspaces
2891
 \gdef\unsepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\space}}
2892
 
2893
% \indexnofonts no-ops all font-change commands.
2894
% This is used when outputting the strings to sort the index by.
2895
\def\indexdummyfont#1{#1}
2896
\def\indexdummytex{TeX}
2897
\def\indexdummydots{...}
2898
 
2899
\def\indexnofonts{%
2900
\def\@{@}%
2901
% how to handle braces?
2902
\def\_{\normalunderscore}%
2903
%
2904
\let\,=\indexdummyfont
2905
\let\"=\indexdummyfont
2906
\let\`=\indexdummyfont
2907
\let\'=\indexdummyfont
2908
\let\^=\indexdummyfont
2909
\let\~=\indexdummyfont
2910
\let\==\indexdummyfont
2911
\let\b=\indexdummyfont
2912
\let\c=\indexdummyfont
2913
\let\d=\indexdummyfont
2914
\let\u=\indexdummyfont
2915
\let\v=\indexdummyfont
2916
\let\H=\indexdummyfont
2917
\let\dotless=\indexdummyfont
2918
% Take care of the plain tex special European modified letters.
2919
\def\AA{AA}%
2920
\def\AE{AE}%
2921
\def\L{L}%
2922
\def\OE{OE}%
2923
\def\O{O}%
2924
\def\aa{aa}%
2925
\def\ae{ae}%
2926
\def\l{l}%
2927
\def\oe{oe}%
2928
\def\o{o}%
2929
\def\ss{ss}%
2930
%
2931
% Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command
2932
% and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc.
2933
% Likewise with the other plain tex font commands.
2934
%\let\tt=\indexdummyfont
2935
%
2936
\let\b=\indexdummyfont
2937
\let\i=\indexdummyfont
2938
\let\r=\indexdummyfont
2939
\let\sc=\indexdummyfont
2940
\let\t=\indexdummyfont
2941
%
2942
\let\TeX=\indexdummytex
2943
\let\acronym=\indexdummyfont
2944
\let\cite=\indexdummyfont
2945
\let\code=\indexdummyfont
2946
\let\command=\indexdummyfont
2947
\let\dfn=\indexdummyfont
2948
\let\dots=\indexdummydots
2949
\let\emph=\indexdummyfont
2950
\let\env=\indexdummyfont
2951
\let\file=\indexdummyfont
2952
\let\kbd=\indexdummyfont
2953
\let\key=\indexdummyfont
2954
\let\math=\indexdummyfont
2955
\let\option=\indexdummyfont
2956
\let\samp=\indexdummyfont
2957
\let\strong=\indexdummyfont
2958
\let\uref=\indexdummyfont
2959
\let\url=\indexdummyfont
2960
\let\var=\indexdummyfont
2961
\let\w=\indexdummyfont
2962
}
2963
 
2964
% To define \realbackslash, we must make \ not be an escape.
2965
% We must first make another character (@) an escape
2966
% so we do not become unable to do a definition.
2967
 
2968
{\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\other
2969
 @gdef@realbackslash{\}}
2970
 
2971
\let\indexbackslash=0  %overridden during \printindex.
2972
\let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)?
2973
 
2974
% For \ifx comparisons.
2975
\def\emptymacro{\empty}
2976
 
2977
% Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case.
2978
%
2979
\def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}\empty}
2980
 
2981
% Workhorse for all \fooindexes.
2982
% #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry --
2983
% \empty if called from \doind, as we usually are.  The main exception
2984
% is with defuns, which call us directly.
2985
%
2986
\def\dosubind#1#2#3{%
2987
  % Put the index entry in the margin if desired.
2988
  \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else
2989
    \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt #2}}%
2990
  \fi
2991
  {%
2992
    \count255=\lastpenalty
2993
    {%
2994
      \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage
2995
      \escapechar=`\\
2996
      {%
2997
        \let\folio = 0% We will expand all macros now EXCEPT \folio.
2998
        \def\rawbackslashxx{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now
2999
        % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash.
3000
        %
3001
        \def\thirdarg{#3}%
3002
        %
3003
        % If third arg is present, precede it with space in sort key.
3004
        \ifx\thirdarg\emptymacro
3005
          \let\subentry = \empty
3006
        \else
3007
          \def\subentry{ #3}%
3008
        \fi
3009
        %
3010
        % First process the index entry with all font commands turned
3011
        % off to get the string to sort by.
3012
        {\indexnofonts \xdef\indexsorttmp{#2\subentry}}%
3013
        %
3014
        % Now the real index entry with the fonts.
3015
        \toks0 = {#2}%
3016
        %
3017
        % If the third (subentry) arg is present, add it to the index
3018
        % line to write.
3019
        \ifx\thirdarg\emptymacro \else
3020
          \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0{#3}}%
3021
        \fi
3022
        %
3023
        % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and
3024
        % the original text, including any font commands.  We write
3025
        % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the
3026
        % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s
3027
        % sorted result.
3028
        \edef\temp{%
3029
          \write\csname#1indfile\endcsname{%
3030
            \realbackslash entry{\indexsorttmp}{\folio}{\the\toks0}}%
3031
        }%
3032
        %
3033
        % If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it
3034
        % by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting
3035
        % the skip again.  Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the
3036
        % \write will make \lastskip zero.  The result is that sequences
3037
        % like this:
3038
        % @end defun
3039
        % @tindex whatever
3040
        % @defun ...
3041
        % will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the
3042
        % start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of
3043
        % the previous defun.
3044
        %
3045
        % But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode.  We
3046
        % don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph.
3047
        %
3048
        % Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too.
3049
        %
3050
        \iflinks
3051
          \ifvmode
3052
            \skip0 = \lastskip
3053
            \ifdim\lastskip = 0pt \else \nobreak\vskip-\lastskip \fi
3054
          \fi
3055
          %
3056
          \temp % do the write
3057
          %
3058
          %
3059
          \ifvmode \ifdim\skip0 = 0pt \else \nobreak\vskip\skip0 \fi \fi
3060
        \fi
3061
      }%
3062
    }%
3063
    \penalty\count255
3064
  }%
3065
}
3066
 
3067
% The index entry written in the file actually looks like
3068
%  \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}
3069
% or
3070
%  \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic}
3071
% The texindex program reads in these files and writes files
3072
% containing these kinds of lines:
3073
%  \initial {c}
3074
%     before the first topic whose initial is c
3075
%  \entry {topic}{pagelist}
3076
%     for a topic that is used without subtopics
3077
%  \primary {topic}
3078
%     for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics
3079
%  \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist}
3080
%     for each subtopic.
3081
 
3082
% Define the user-accessible indexing commands
3083
% @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex.
3084
 
3085
\def\findex {\fnindex}
3086
\def\kindex {\kyindex}
3087
\def\cindex {\cpindex}
3088
\def\vindex {\vrindex}
3089
\def\tindex {\tpindex}
3090
\def\pindex {\pgindex}
3091
 
3092
\def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub}
3093
{\obeylines %
3094
\gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup %
3095
\dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}}
3096
 
3097
% Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material.
3098
 
3099
% @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed.
3100
% It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered).
3101
%
3102
\def\printindex{\parsearg\doprintindex}
3103
\def\doprintindex#1{\begingroup
3104
  \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}%
3105
  %
3106
  \smallfonts \rm
3107
  \tolerance = 9500
3108
  \indexbreaks
3109
  %
3110
  % See if the index file exists and is nonempty.
3111
  % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains
3112
  % \initial {@}
3113
  % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces
3114
  % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence).
3115
  \catcode`\@ = 11
3116
  \openin 1 \jobname.#1s
3117
  \ifeof 1
3118
    % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index,
3119
    % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the
3120
    % index.  The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure
3121
    % there is some text.
3122
    \putwordIndexNonexistent
3123
  \else
3124
    %
3125
    % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof
3126
    % false.  We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so
3127
    % it can discover if there is anything in it.
3128
    \read 1 to \temp
3129
    \ifeof 1
3130
      \putwordIndexIsEmpty
3131
    \else
3132
      % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape
3133
      % character.  It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change
3134
      % to make right now.
3135
      \def\indexbackslash{\rawbackslashxx}%
3136
      \catcode`\\ = 0
3137
      \escapechar = `\\
3138
      \begindoublecolumns
3139
      \input \jobname.#1s
3140
      \enddoublecolumns
3141
    \fi
3142
  \fi
3143
  \closein 1
3144
\endgroup}
3145
 
3146
% These macros are used by the sorted index file itself.
3147
% Change them to control the appearance of the index.
3148
 
3149
\def\initial#1{{%
3150
  % Some minor font changes for the special characters.
3151
  \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt
3152
  %
3153
  % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own.
3154
  \removelastskip
3155
  %
3156
  % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus.
3157
  \penalty -300
3158
  %
3159
  % Typeset the initial.  Making this add up to a whole number of
3160
  % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column
3161
  % to column.  It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch
3162
  % we need before each entry, but it's better.
3163
  %
3164
  % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns.
3165
  \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip
3166
  \leftline{\secbf #1}%
3167
  \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip
3168
  %
3169
  % Do our best not to break after the initial.
3170
  \nobreak
3171
}}
3172
 
3173
% This typesets a paragraph consisting of #1, dot leaders, and then #2
3174
% flush to the right margin.  It is used for index and table of contents
3175
% entries.  The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
3176
%
3177
\def\entry#1#2{\begingroup
3178
  %
3179
  % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't
3180
  % affect previous text.
3181
  \par
3182
  %
3183
  % Do not fill out the last line with white space.
3184
  \parfillskip = 0in
3185
  %
3186
  % No extra space above this paragraph.
3187
  \parskip = 0in
3188
  %
3189
  % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
3190
  \finalhyphendemerits = 0
3191
  %
3192
  % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number
3193
  % don't both fit on one line.  In that case, bob suggests starting the
3194
  % dots pretty far over on the line.  Unfortunately, a large
3195
  % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across
3196
  % lines.  So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders.
3197
  %
3198
  % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start
3199
  % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that.
3200
  \hangindent = 2em
3201
  %
3202
  % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line
3203
  % with blank space.
3204
  \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil
3205
  %
3206
  % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing columns.
3207
  \vskip 0pt plus1pt
3208
  %
3209
  % Start a ``paragraph'' for the index entry so the line breaking
3210
  % parameters we've set above will have an effect.
3211
  \noindent
3212
  %
3213
  % Insert the text of the index entry.  TeX will do line-breaking on it.
3214
  #1%
3215
  % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if
3216
  % there are no page numbers.  The next person who breaks this will be
3217
  % cursed by a Unix daemon.
3218
  \def\tempa{{\rm }}%
3219
  \def\tempb{#2}%
3220
  \edef\tempc{\tempa}%
3221
  \edef\tempd{\tempb}%
3222
  \ifx\tempc\tempd\ \else%
3223
    %
3224
    % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out
3225
    % this line with blank space.  (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the
3226
    % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.)
3227
    \hfil\penalty50
3228
    \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
3229
    %
3230
    % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as
3231
    % part of (the primitive) \par.  Without it, a spurious underfull
3232
    % \hbox ensues.
3233
    \ifpdf
3234
      \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph.
3235
    \else
3236
      \ #2% The page number ends the paragraph.
3237
    \fi
3238
  \fi%
3239
  \par
3240
\endgroup}
3241
 
3242
% Like \dotfill except takes at least 1 em.
3243
\def\indexdotfill{\cleaders
3244
  \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu ${\it .}$ \mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill}
3245
 
3246
\def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}}
3247
 
3248
\newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm
3249
\def\secondary#1#2{{%
3250
  \parfillskip=0in
3251
  \parskip=0in
3252
  \hangindent=1in
3253
  \hangafter=1
3254
  \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill
3255
  \ifpdf
3256
    \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph.
3257
  \else
3258
    #2
3259
  \fi
3260
  \par
3261
}}
3262
 
3263
% Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes.
3264
% Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say,
3265
% the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself.
3266
\catcode`\@=11
3267
 
3268
\newbox\partialpage
3269
\newdimen\doublecolumnhsize
3270
 
3271
\def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns
3272
  % Grab any single-column material above us.
3273
  \output = {%
3274
    %
3275
    % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a
3276
    % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output
3277
    % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is
3278
    % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off).  In
3279
    % that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal
3280
    % output routine.  Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this
3281
    % runs and this will be a no-op.  See the indexspread.tex test case.
3282
    \ifvoid\partialpage \else
3283
      \onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}%
3284
    \fi
3285
    %
3286
    \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{%
3287
      % Unvbox the main output page.
3288
      \unvbox\PAGE
3289
      \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip
3290
    }%
3291
  }%
3292
  \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage
3293
  %
3294
  % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages.
3295
  \output = {\doublecolumnout}%
3296
  %
3297
  % Change the page size parameters.  We could do this once outside this
3298
  % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11
3299
  % format, but then we repeat the same computation.  Repeating a couple
3300
  % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the
3301
  % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place.
3302
  %
3303
  % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between
3304
  % the columns.  We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it
3305
  % changes automatically with the paper format.  The magic constant
3306
  % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt)
3307
  % as it did when we hard-coded it.
3308
  %
3309
  % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we
3310
  % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially)
3311
  % been clobbered.
3312
  %
3313
  \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize
3314
    \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize
3315
    \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2
3316
  \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
3317
  %
3318
  % Double the \vsize as well.  (We don't need a separate register here,
3319
  % since nobody clobbers \vsize.)
3320
  \vsize = 2\vsize
3321
}
3322
 
3323
% The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except
3324
% the last.
3325
%
3326
\def\doublecolumnout{%
3327
  \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth
3328
  % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal
3329
  % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the
3330
  % previous page.
3331
  \dimen@ = \vsize
3332
  \divide\dimen@ by 2
3333
  \advance\dimen@ by -\ht\partialpage
3334
  %
3335
  % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right.
3336
  \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@
3337
  \onepageout\pagesofar
3338
  \unvbox255
3339
  \penalty\outputpenalty
3340
}
3341
%
3342
% Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material,
3343
% followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2.
3344
\def\pagesofar{%
3345
  \unvbox\partialpage
3346
  %
3347
  \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
3348
  \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize
3349
  \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}%
3350
}
3351
%
3352
% All done with double columns.
3353
\def\enddoublecolumns{%
3354
  \output = {%
3355
    % Split the last of the double-column material.  Leave it on the
3356
    % current page, no automatic page break.
3357
    \balancecolumns
3358
    %
3359
    % If we end up splitting too much material for the current page,
3360
    % though, there will be another page break right after this \output
3361
    % invocation ends.  Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not
3362
    % want to call it again.  Therefore, reset \output to its normal
3363
    % definition right away.  (We hope \balancecolumns will never be
3364
    % called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes
3365
    % the output somewhat more palatable.)
3366
    \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}%
3367
  }%
3368
  \eject
3369
  \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns
3370
  %
3371
  % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted
3372
  % the current page.  We're now back to normal single-column
3373
  % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the
3374
  % \endgroup where \vsize got restored).
3375
  \pagegoal = \vsize
3376
}
3377
%
3378
% Called at the end of the double column material.
3379
\def\balancecolumns{%
3380
  \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120.
3381
  \dimen@ = \ht0
3382
  \advance\dimen@ by \topskip
3383
  \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip
3384
  \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to
3385
  %debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}%
3386
  \splittopskip = \topskip
3387
  % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint.
3388
  {%
3389
    \vbadness = 10000
3390
    \loop
3391
      \global\setbox3 = \copy0
3392
      \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@
3393
    \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@
3394
      \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt
3395
    \repeat
3396
  }%
3397
  %debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}%
3398
  \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}%
3399
  \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}%
3400
  %
3401
  \pagesofar
3402
}
3403
\catcode`\@ = \other
3404
 
3405
 
3406
\message{sectioning,}
3407
% Chapters, sections, etc.
3408
 
3409
\newcount\chapno
3410
\newcount\secno        \secno=0
3411
\newcount\subsecno     \subsecno=0
3412
\newcount\subsubsecno  \subsubsecno=0
3413
 
3414
% This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ...
3415
\newcount\appendixno  \appendixno = `\@
3416
% \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno}
3417
% We do the following for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual
3418
% letter in the expansion, not just typeset.
3419
\def\appendixletter{%
3420
  \ifnum\appendixno=`A A%
3421
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B%
3422
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C%
3423
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D%
3424
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E%
3425
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F%
3426
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G%
3427
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H%
3428
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I%
3429
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J%
3430
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K%
3431
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L%
3432
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M%
3433
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N%
3434
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O%
3435
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P%
3436
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q%
3437
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R%
3438
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S%
3439
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T%
3440
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U%
3441
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V%
3442
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W%
3443
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X%
3444
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y%
3445
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z%
3446
  % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is
3447
  % expanded while writing the .toc file.  \char\appendixno is not
3448
  % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out
3449
  % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it.
3450
  \else\char\the\appendixno
3451
  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
3452
  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
3453
 
3454
% Each @chapter defines this as the name of the chapter.
3455
% page headings and footings can use it.  @section does likewise.
3456
\def\thischapter{}
3457
\def\thissection{}
3458
 
3459
\newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level
3460
\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raise/lowersections modify this count
3461
 
3462
% @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc.
3463
\def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1}
3464
\let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name
3465
 
3466
% @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc.
3467
\def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1}
3468
\let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name
3469
 
3470
% Choose a numbered-heading macro
3471
% #1 is heading level if unmodified by @raisesections or @lowersections
3472
% #2 is text for heading
3473
\def\numhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
3474
\ifcase\absseclevel
3475
  \chapterzzz{#2}
3476
\or
3477
  \seczzz{#2}
3478
\or
3479
  \numberedsubseczzz{#2}
3480
\or
3481
  \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
3482
\else
3483
  \ifnum \absseclevel<0
3484
    \chapterzzz{#2}
3485
  \else
3486
    \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
3487
  \fi
3488
\fi
3489
}
3490
 
3491
% like \numhead, but chooses appendix heading levels
3492
\def\apphead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
3493
\ifcase\absseclevel
3494
  \appendixzzz{#2}
3495
\or
3496
  \appendixsectionzzz{#2}
3497
\or
3498
  \appendixsubseczzz{#2}
3499
\or
3500
  \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2}
3501
\else
3502
  \ifnum \absseclevel<0
3503
    \appendixzzz{#2}
3504
  \else
3505
    \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2}
3506
  \fi
3507
\fi
3508
}
3509
 
3510
% like \numhead, but chooses numberless heading levels
3511
\def\unnmhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
3512
\ifcase\absseclevel
3513
  \unnumberedzzz{#2}
3514
\or
3515
  \unnumberedseczzz{#2}
3516
\or
3517
  \unnumberedsubseczzz{#2}
3518
\or
3519
  \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
3520
\else
3521
  \ifnum \absseclevel<0
3522
    \unnumberedzzz{#2}
3523
  \else
3524
    \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
3525
  \fi
3526
\fi
3527
}
3528
 
3529
% @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered.
3530
\def\thischaptername{No Chapter Title}
3531
\outer\def\chapter{\parsearg\chapteryyy}
3532
\def\chapteryyy #1{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz
3533
\def\chapterzzz #1{%
3534
\secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
3535
\global\advance \chapno by 1 \message{\putwordChapter\space \the\chapno}%
3536
\chapmacro {#1}{\the\chapno}%
3537
\gdef\thissection{#1}%
3538
\gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
3539
% We don't substitute the actual chapter name into \thischapter
3540
% because we don't want its macros evaluated now.
3541
\xdef\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \the\chapno: \noexpand\thischaptername}%
3542
\toks0 = {#1}%
3543
\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash chapentry{\the\toks0}%
3544
                                  {\the\chapno}}}%
3545
\temp
3546
\donoderef
3547
\global\let\section = \numberedsec
3548
\global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
3549
\global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
3550
}
3551
 
3552
\outer\def\appendix{\parsearg\appendixyyy}
3553
\def\appendixyyy #1{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz
3554
\def\appendixzzz #1{%
3555
\secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
3556
\global\advance \appendixno by 1
3557
\message{\putwordAppendix\space \appendixletter}%
3558
\chapmacro {#1}{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter}%
3559
\gdef\thissection{#1}%
3560
\gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
3561
\xdef\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter: \noexpand\thischaptername}%
3562
\toks0 = {#1}%
3563
\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash appendixentry{\the\toks0}%
3564
                       {\appendixletter}}}%
3565
\temp
3566
\appendixnoderef
3567
\global\let\section = \appendixsec
3568
\global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec
3569
\global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec
3570
}
3571
 
3572
% @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered.
3573
\outer\def\centerchap{\parsearg\centerchapyyy}
3574
\def\centerchapyyy #1{{\let\unnumbchapmacro=\centerchapmacro \unnumberedyyy{#1}}}
3575
 
3576
% @top is like @unnumbered.
3577
\outer\def\top{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy}
3578
 
3579
\outer\def\unnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy}
3580
\def\unnumberedyyy #1{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz
3581
\def\unnumberedzzz #1{%
3582
\secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
3583
%
3584
% This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the
3585
% argument to \message.  Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX
3586
% expanded them.  For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX
3587
% expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant
3588
% to be executed, not expanded).
3589
%
3590
% Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear
3591
% as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself.  We use
3592
% \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once,
3593
% simply yielding the contents of <toks register>.  (We also do this for
3594
% the toc entries.)
3595
\toks0 = {#1}\message{(\the\toks0)}%
3596
%
3597
\unnumbchapmacro {#1}%
3598
\gdef\thischapter{#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
3599
\toks0 = {#1}%
3600
\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbchapentry{\the\toks0}}}%
3601
\temp
3602
\unnumbnoderef
3603
\global\let\section = \unnumberedsec
3604
\global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec
3605
\global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec
3606
}
3607
 
3608
% Sections.
3609
\outer\def\numberedsec{\parsearg\secyyy}
3610
\def\secyyy #1{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
3611
\def\seczzz #1{%
3612
\subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 %
3613
\gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}%
3614
\toks0 = {#1}%
3615
\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash secentry{\the\toks0}%
3616
                                  {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}}}%
3617
\temp
3618
\donoderef
3619
\nobreak
3620
}
3621
 
3622
\outer\def\appendixsection{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy}
3623
\outer\def\appendixsec{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy}
3624
\def\appendixsecyyy #1{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz
3625
\def\appendixsectionzzz #1{%
3626
\subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 %
3627
\gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}%
3628
\toks0 = {#1}%
3629
\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash secentry{\the\toks0}%
3630
                                  {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}}}%
3631
\temp
3632
\appendixnoderef
3633
\nobreak
3634
}
3635
 
3636
\outer\def\unnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsecyyy}
3637
\def\unnumberedsecyyy #1{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz
3638
\def\unnumberedseczzz #1{%
3639
\plainsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
3640
\toks0 = {#1}%
3641
\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsecentry%
3642
  {\the\toks0}{\the\chapno}}}%
3643
\temp
3644
\unnumbnoderef
3645
\nobreak
3646
}
3647
 
3648
% Subsections.
3649
\outer\def\numberedsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsecyyy}
3650
\def\numberedsubsecyyy #1{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz
3651
\def\numberedsubseczzz #1{%
3652
\gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 %
3653
\subsecheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}%
3654
\toks0 = {#1}%
3655
\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsecentry{\the\toks0}%
3656
                                    {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}}%
3657
\temp
3658
\donoderef
3659
\nobreak
3660
}
3661
 
3662
\outer\def\appendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsecyyy}
3663
\def\appendixsubsecyyy #1{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz
3664
\def\appendixsubseczzz #1{%
3665
\gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 %
3666
\subsecheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}%
3667
\toks0 = {#1}%
3668
\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsecentry{\the\toks0}%
3669
                                {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}}%
3670
\temp
3671
\appendixnoderef
3672
\nobreak
3673
}
3674
 
3675
\outer\def\unnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsecyyy}
3676
\def\unnumberedsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz
3677
\def\unnumberedsubseczzz #1{%
3678
\plainsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
3679
\toks0 = {#1}%
3680
\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsubsecentry%
3681
  {\the\toks0}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}}}%
3682
\temp
3683
\unnumbnoderef
3684
\nobreak
3685
}
3686
 
3687
% Subsubsections.
3688
\outer\def\numberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsubsecyyy}
3689
\def\numberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz
3690
\def\numberedsubsubseczzz #1{%
3691
\gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 %
3692
\subsubsecheading {#1}
3693
  {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}%
3694
\toks0 = {#1}%
3695
\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsubsecentry{\the\toks0}%
3696
  {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}}%
3697
\temp
3698
\donoderef
3699
\nobreak
3700
}
3701
 
3702
\outer\def\appendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubsecyyy}
3703
\def\appendixsubsubsecyyy #1{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz
3704
\def\appendixsubsubseczzz #1{%
3705
\gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 %
3706
\subsubsecheading {#1}
3707
  {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}%
3708
\toks0 = {#1}%
3709
\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsubsecentry{\the\toks0}%
3710
  {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}}%
3711
\temp
3712
\appendixnoderef
3713
\nobreak
3714
}
3715
 
3716
\outer\def\unnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy}
3717
\def\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz
3718
\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz #1{%
3719
\plainsubsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
3720
\toks0 = {#1}%
3721
\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsubsubsecentry%
3722
  {\the\toks0}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}}%
3723
\temp
3724
\unnumbnoderef
3725
\nobreak
3726
}
3727
 
3728
% These are variants which are not "outer", so they can appear in @ifinfo.
3729
% Actually, they should now be obsolete; ordinary section commands should work.
3730
\def\infotop{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz}
3731
\def\infounnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz}
3732
\def\infounnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedseczzz}
3733
\def\infounnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubseczzz}
3734
\def\infounnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubseczzz}
3735
 
3736
\def\infoappendix{\parsearg\appendixzzz}
3737
\def\infoappendixsec{\parsearg\appendixseczzz}
3738
\def\infoappendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubseczzz}
3739
\def\infoappendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubseczzz}
3740
 
3741
\def\infochapter{\parsearg\chapterzzz}
3742
\def\infosection{\parsearg\sectionzzz}
3743
\def\infosubsection{\parsearg\subsectionzzz}
3744
\def\infosubsubsection{\parsearg\subsubsectionzzz}
3745
 
3746
% These macros control what the section commands do, according
3747
% to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered).
3748
% Define them by default for a numbered chapter.
3749
\global\let\section = \numberedsec
3750
\global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
3751
\global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
3752
 
3753
% Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading
3754
 
3755
% NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such:
3756
%       1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit
3757
%          overlong headings to fold.
3758
%       2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a
3759
%          heading is obnoxious; this forbids it.
3760
%       3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and
3761
%          if justification is not attempted.  Hence \raggedright.
3762
 
3763
 
3764
\def\majorheading{\parsearg\majorheadingzzz}
3765
\def\majorheadingzzz #1{%
3766
{\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }%
3767
{\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
3768
                  \parindent=0pt\raggedright
3769
                  \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200}
3770
 
3771
\def\chapheading{\parsearg\chapheadingzzz}
3772
\def\chapheadingzzz #1{\chapbreak %
3773
{\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
3774
                  \parindent=0pt\raggedright
3775
                  \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200}
3776
 
3777
% @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading.
3778
\def\heading{\parsearg\plainsecheading}
3779
\def\subheading{\parsearg\plainsubsecheading}
3780
\def\subsubheading{\parsearg\plainsubsubsecheading}
3781
 
3782
% These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only
3783
% (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it),
3784
% given all the information in convenient, parsed form.
3785
 
3786
%%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative)
3787
\def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi}
3788
 
3789
\def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname}
3790
 
3791
%%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it
3792
% Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed)
3793
 
3794
\newskip\chapheadingskip
3795
 
3796
\def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}}
3797
\def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject}
3798
\def\chapoddpage{\chappager \ifodd\pageno \else \hbox to 0pt{} \chappager\fi}
3799
 
3800
\def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname}
3801
 
3802
\def\CHAPPAGoff{%
3803
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
3804
\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak
3805
\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager}
3806
 
3807
\def\CHAPPAGon{%
3808
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
3809
\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager
3810
\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager
3811
\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}}
3812
 
3813
\def\CHAPPAGodd{
3814
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
3815
\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage
3816
\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage
3817
\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}}
3818
 
3819
\CHAPPAGon
3820
 
3821
\def\CHAPFplain{
3822
\global\let\chapmacro=\chfplain
3823
\global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfplain
3824
\global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfplain}
3825
 
3826
% Plain chapter opening.
3827
% #1 is the text, #2 the chapter number or empty if unnumbered.
3828
\def\chfplain#1#2{%
3829
  \pchapsepmacro
3830
  {%
3831
    \chapfonts \rm
3832
    \def\chapnum{#2}%
3833
    \setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\chapnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}%
3834
    \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
3835
          \hangindent = \wd0 \centerparametersmaybe
3836
          \unhbox0 #1\par}%
3837
  }%
3838
  \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title
3839
  \nobreak
3840
}
3841
 
3842
% Plain opening for unnumbered.
3843
\def\unnchfplain#1{\chfplain{#1}{}}
3844
 
3845
% @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered.
3846
\let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
3847
\def\centerchfplain#1{{%
3848
  \def\centerparametersmaybe{%
3849
    \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip
3850
    \leftskip = \rightskip
3851
    \parfillskip = 0pt
3852
  }%
3853
  \chfplain{#1}{}%
3854
}}
3855
 
3856
\CHAPFplain % The default
3857
 
3858
\def\unnchfopen #1{%
3859
\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
3860
                       \parindent=0pt\raggedright
3861
                       \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
3862
}
3863
 
3864
\def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts
3865
\vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}%
3866
\par\penalty 5000 %
3867
}
3868
 
3869
\def\centerchfopen #1{%
3870
\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
3871
                       \parindent=0pt
3872
                       \hfill {\rm #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
3873
}
3874
 
3875
\def\CHAPFopen{
3876
\global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen
3877
\global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfopen
3878
\global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen}
3879
 
3880
 
3881
% Section titles.
3882
\newskip\secheadingskip
3883
\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip {-1000}}
3884
\def\secheading#1#2#3{\sectionheading{sec}{#2.#3}{#1}}
3885
\def\plainsecheading#1{\sectionheading{sec}{}{#1}}
3886
 
3887
% Subsection titles.
3888
\newskip \subsecheadingskip
3889
\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip {-500}}
3890
\def\subsecheading#1#2#3#4{\sectionheading{subsec}{#2.#3.#4}{#1}}
3891
\def\plainsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsec}{}{#1}}
3892
 
3893
% Subsubsection titles.
3894
\let\subsubsecheadingskip = \subsecheadingskip
3895
\let\subsubsecheadingbreak = \subsecheadingbreak
3896
\def\subsubsecheading#1#2#3#4#5{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{#2.#3.#4.#5}{#1}}
3897
\def\plainsubsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{}{#1}}
3898
 
3899
 
3900
% Print any size section title.
3901
%
3902
% #1 is the section type (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #2 is the section
3903
% number (maybe empty), #3 the text.
3904
\def\sectionheading#1#2#3{%
3905
  {%
3906
    \expandafter\advance\csname #1headingskip\endcsname by \parskip
3907
    \csname #1headingbreak\endcsname
3908
  }%
3909
  {%
3910
    % Switch to the right set of fonts.
3911
    \csname #1fonts\endcsname \rm
3912
    %
3913
    % Only insert the separating space if we have a section number.
3914
    \def\secnum{#2}%
3915
    \setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\secnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}%
3916
    %
3917
    \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
3918
          \hangindent = \wd0 % zero if no section number
3919
          \unhbox0 #3}%
3920
  }%
3921
  \ifdim\parskip<10pt \nobreak\kern10pt\nobreak\kern-\parskip\fi \nobreak
3922
}
3923
 
3924
 
3925
\message{toc,}
3926
% Table of contents.
3927
\newwrite\tocfile
3928
 
3929
% Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary.
3930
% Called from @chapter, etc.  We supply {\folio} at the end of the
3931
% argument, which will end up as the last argument to the \...entry macro.
3932
%
3933
% We open the .toc file here instead of at @setfilename or any other
3934
% fixed time so that @contents can be put in the document anywhere.
3935
%
3936
\newif\iftocfileopened
3937
\def\writetocentry#1{%
3938
  \iftocfileopened\else
3939
    \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc
3940
    \global\tocfileopenedtrue
3941
  \fi
3942
  \iflinks \write\tocfile{#1{\folio}}\fi
3943
  %
3944
  % Tell \shipout to create a page destination if we're doing pdf, which
3945
  % will be the target of the links in the table of contents.  We can't
3946
  % just do it on every page because the title pages are numbered 1 and
3947
  % 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first two pages
3948
  % of the document.  Thus, we'd have two destinations named `1', and
3949
  % two named `2'.
3950
  \ifpdf \pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi
3951
}
3952
 
3953
\newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in
3954
\newcount\savepageno
3955
\newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1
3956
 
3957
% Finish up the main text and prepare to read what we've written
3958
% to \tocfile.
3959
%
3960
\def\startcontents#1{%
3961
   % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should
3962
   % start on an odd page, unlike chapters.  Thus, we maintain
3963
   % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro.
3964
   % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se>
3965
   \contentsalignmacro
3966
   \immediate\closeout\tocfile
3967
   %
3968
   % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline.
3969
   % It is abundantly clear what they are.
3970
   \unnumbchapmacro{#1}\def\thischapter{}%
3971
   \savepageno = \pageno
3972
   \begingroup                  % Set up to handle contents files properly.
3973
      \catcode`\\=0  \catcode`\{=1  \catcode`\}=2  \catcode`\@=11
3974
      % We can't do this, because then an actual ^ in a section
3975
      % title fails, e.g., @chapter ^ -- exponentiation.  --karl, 9jul97.
3976
      %\catcode`\^=7 % to see ^^e4 as \"a etc. juha@piuha.ydi.vtt.fi
3977
      \raggedbottom             % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
3978
      \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
3979
      %
3980
      % Roman numerals for page numbers.
3981
      \ifnum \pageno>0 \pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi
3982
}
3983
 
3984
 
3985
% Normal (long) toc.
3986
\def\contents{%
3987
   \startcontents{\putwordTOC}%
3988
     \openin 1 \jobname.toc
3989
     \ifeof 1 \else
3990
       \closein 1
3991
       \input \jobname.toc
3992
     \fi
3993
     \vfill \eject
3994
     \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
3995
     \pdfmakeoutlines
3996
   \endgroup
3997
   \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
3998
   \pageno = \savepageno
3999
}
4000
 
4001
% And just the chapters.
4002
\def\summarycontents{%
4003
   \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}%
4004
      %
4005
      \let\chapentry = \shortchapentry
4006
      \let\appendixentry = \shortappendixentry
4007
      \let\unnumbchapentry = \shortunnumberedentry
4008
      % We want a true roman here for the page numbers.
4009
      \secfonts
4010
      \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf \let\sl=\shortcontsl
4011
      \rm
4012
      \hyphenpenalty = 10000
4013
      \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little.
4014
      \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{}
4015
      \def\unnumbsecentry ##1##2##3{}
4016
      \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{}
4017
      \def\unnumbsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4{}
4018
      \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{}
4019
      \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{}
4020
      \openin 1 \jobname.toc
4021
      \ifeof 1 \else
4022
        \closein 1
4023
        \input \jobname.toc
4024
      \fi
4025
     \vfill \eject
4026
     \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
4027
   \endgroup
4028
   \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
4029
   \pageno = \savepageno
4030
}
4031
\let\shortcontents = \summarycontents
4032
 
4033
\ifpdf
4034
  \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}%
4035
\fi
4036
 
4037
% These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents.
4038
% The first argument is the chapter or section name.
4039
% The last argument is the page number.
4040
% The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ...
4041
 
4042
% Chapters, in the main contents.
4043
\def\chapentry#1#2#3{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#3}}
4044
%
4045
% Chapters, in the short toc.
4046
% See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings.
4047
\def\shortchapentry#1#2#3{%
4048
  \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#3\egroup}%
4049
}
4050
 
4051
% Appendices, in the main contents.
4052
\def\appendixentry#1#2#3{\dochapentry{\putwordAppendix{} #2\labelspace#1}{#3}}
4053
%
4054
% Appendices, in the short toc.
4055
\let\shortappendixentry = \shortchapentry
4056
 
4057
% Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents.
4058
% The arg is, e.g., `Appendix A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter.
4059
% We could simplify the code here by writing out an \appendixentry
4060
% command in the toc file for appendices, instead of using \chapentry
4061
% for both, but it doesn't seem worth it.
4062
%
4063
\newdimen\shortappendixwidth
4064
%
4065
\def\shortchaplabel#1{%
4066
  % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the
4067
  % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts.
4068
  % But use \hss just in case.
4069
  % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after
4070
  % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.)
4071
  \dimen0 = 1em
4072
  \hbox to \dimen0{#1\hss}%
4073
}
4074
 
4075
% Unnumbered chapters.
4076
\def\unnumbchapentry#1#2{\dochapentry{#1}{#2}}
4077
\def\shortunnumberedentry#1#2{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#2\egroup}}
4078
 
4079
% Sections.
4080
\def\secentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2.#3\labelspace#1}{#4}}
4081
\def\unnumbsecentry#1#2#3{\dosecentry{#1}{#3}}
4082
 
4083
% Subsections.
4084
\def\subsecentry#1#2#3#4#5{\dosubsecentry{#2.#3.#4\labelspace#1}{#5}}
4085
\def\unnumbsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
4086
 
4087
% And subsubsections.
4088
\def\subsubsecentry#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
4089
  \dosubsubsecentry{#2.#3.#4.#5\labelspace#1}{#6}}
4090
\def\unnumbsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4#5{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#5}}
4091
 
4092
% This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels.
4093
\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 3pc
4094
 
4095
% Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the
4096
% page number.
4097
%
4098
% If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters
4099
% if at all possible; hence the \penalty.
4100
\def\dochapentry#1#2{%
4101
   \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip
4102
   \begingroup
4103
     \chapentryfonts
4104
     \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
4105
   \endgroup
4106
   \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip
4107
}
4108
 
4109
\def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup
4110
  \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent
4111
  \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
4112
\endgroup}
4113
 
4114
\def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
4115
  \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent
4116
  \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
4117
\endgroup}
4118
 
4119
\def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
4120
  \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent
4121
  \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
4122
\endgroup}
4123
 
4124
% Final typesetting of a toc entry; we use the same \entry macro as for
4125
% the index entries, but we want to suppress hyphenation here.  (We
4126
% can't do that in the \entry macro, since index entries might consist
4127
% of hyphenated-identifiers-that-do-not-fit-on-a-line-and-nothing-else.)
4128
\def\tocentry#1#2{\begingroup
4129
  \vskip 0pt plus1pt % allow a little stretch for the sake of nice page breaks
4130
  % Do not use \turnoffactive in these arguments.  Since the toc is
4131
  % typeset in cmr, characters such as _ would come out wrong; we
4132
  % have to do the usual translation tricks.
4133
  \entry{#1}{#2}%
4134
\endgroup}
4135
 
4136
% Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title.
4137
\def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax}
4138
 
4139
\def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}}
4140
\def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}}
4141
 
4142
\def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm}
4143
\def\secentryfonts{\textfonts}
4144
\let\subsecentryfonts = \textfonts
4145
\let\subsubsecentryfonts = \textfonts
4146
 
4147
 
4148
\message{environments,}
4149
% @foo ... @end foo.
4150
 
4151
% @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}.
4152
%
4153
% Since these characters are used in examples, it should be an even number of
4154
% \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em.
4155
%
4156
\def\point{$\star$}
4157
\def\result{\leavevmode\raise.15ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}}
4158
\def\expansion{\leavevmode\raise.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}}
4159
\def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}}
4160
\def\equiv{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}}
4161
 
4162
% The @error{} command.
4163
% Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit.
4164
%
4165
\newbox\errorbox
4166
%
4167
{\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box.
4168
\dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules
4169
% The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)
4170
\setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \tensf error\kern-1.5pt}
4171
%
4172
\global\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
4173
   \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.
4174
   \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules.
4175
   \vbox{
4176
      \hrule height\dimen2
4177
      \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt          % Space to left of text.
4178
         \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below.
4179
         \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right.
4180
      \hrule height\dimen2}
4181
    \hfil}
4182
%
4183
\def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox}
4184
 
4185
% @tex ... @end tex    escapes into raw Tex temporarily.
4186
% One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works.
4187
% But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character.
4188
 
4189
\def\tex{\begingroup
4190
  \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2
4191
  \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6
4192
  \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=13 \let~=\tie
4193
  \catcode `\%=14
4194
  \catcode 43=12 % plus
4195
  \catcode`\"=12
4196
  \catcode`\==12
4197
  \catcode`\|=12
4198
  \catcode`\<=12
4199
  \catcode`\>=12
4200
  \escapechar=`\\
4201
  %
4202
  \let\b=\ptexb
4203
  \let\bullet=\ptexbullet
4204
  \let\c=\ptexc
4205
  \let\,=\ptexcomma
4206
  \let\.=\ptexdot
4207
  \let\dots=\ptexdots
4208
  \let\equiv=\ptexequiv
4209
  \let\!=\ptexexclam
4210
  \let\i=\ptexi
4211
  \let\{=\ptexlbrace
4212
  \let\+=\tabalign
4213
  \let\}=\ptexrbrace
4214
  \let\*=\ptexstar
4215
  \let\t=\ptext
4216
  %
4217
  \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}%
4218
  \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}%
4219
  \def\@{@}%
4220
\let\Etex=\endgroup}
4221
 
4222
% Define @lisp ... @end lisp.
4223
% @lisp does a \begingroup so it can rebind things,
4224
% including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous).
4225
 
4226
% Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp.
4227
\newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in
4228
 
4229
% This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other
4230
% such environments.  \null is better than a space, since it doesn't
4231
% have any width.
4232
\def\lisppar{\null\endgraf}
4233
 
4234
% Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
4235
% space in the output.  Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
4236
% is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
4237
% should produce a line of output anyway.
4238
%
4239
{\obeyspaces %
4240
\gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}}
4241
 
4242
% Define \obeyedspace to be our active space, whatever it is.  This is
4243
% for use in \parsearg.
4244
{\sepspaces%
4245
\global\let\obeyedspace= }
4246
 
4247
% This space is always present above and below environments.
4248
\newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt
4249
 
4250
% Make spacing and below environment symmetrical.  We use \parskip here
4251
% to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip
4252
% is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the
4253
% start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip
4254
%
4255
\def\aboveenvbreak{{%
4256
  \ifnum\lastpenalty < 10000
4257
    \advance\envskipamount by \parskip
4258
    \endgraf
4259
    \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount
4260
      \removelastskip
4261
      \penalty-50
4262
      \vskip\envskipamount
4263
    \fi
4264
  \fi
4265
}}
4266
 
4267
\let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak
4268
 
4269
% \nonarrowing is a flag.  If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins.
4270
\let\nonarrowing=\relax
4271
 
4272
% @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around
4273
% environment contents.
4274
\font\circle=lcircle10
4275
\newdimen\circthick
4276
\newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner
4277
\newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip
4278
\circthick=\fontdimen8\circle
4279
%
4280
\def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth
4281
\def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}}
4282
\def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}}
4283
\def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}}
4284
\def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
4285
        \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr
4286
        \hskip\rskip}}
4287
\def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
4288
        \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr
4289
        \hskip\rskip}}
4290
%
4291
\newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip
4292
 
4293
\long\def\cartouche{%
4294
\begingroup
4295
        \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip
4296
        \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt %we want these *outside*.
4297
        \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip
4298
                          \advance\cartinner by-\rskip
4299
        \cartouter=\hsize
4300
        \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either
4301
%                                    side, and for 6pt waste from
4302
%                                    each corner char, and rule thickness
4303
        \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip
4304
        % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin.
4305
        \let\nonarrowing=\comment
4306
        \vbox\bgroup
4307
                \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt
4308
                \carttop
4309
                \hbox\bgroup
4310
                        \hskip\lskip
4311
                        \vrule\kern3pt
4312
                        \vbox\bgroup
4313
                                \hsize=\cartinner
4314
                                \kern3pt
4315
                                \begingroup
4316
                                        \baselineskip=\normbskip
4317
                                        \lineskip=\normlskip
4318
                                        \parskip=\normpskip
4319
                                        \vskip -\parskip
4320
\def\Ecartouche{%
4321
                                \endgroup
4322
                                \kern3pt
4323
                        \egroup
4324
                        \kern3pt\vrule
4325
                        \hskip\rskip
4326
                \egroup
4327
                \cartbot
4328
        \egroup
4329
\endgroup
4330
}}
4331
 
4332
 
4333
% This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants,
4334
% inside a group.
4335
\def\nonfillstart{%
4336
  \aboveenvbreak
4337
  \inENV % This group ends at the end of the body
4338
  \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy
4339
  \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens.
4340
  \singlespace
4341
  \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines
4342
  \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output
4343
  \parskip = 0pt
4344
  \parindent = 0pt
4345
  \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes
4346
  % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing
4347
  % at next level down.
4348
  \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
4349
    \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing
4350
    \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing
4351
    \let\exdent=\nofillexdent
4352
    \let\nonarrowing=\relax
4353
  \fi
4354
}
4355
 
4356
% Define the \E... control sequence only if we are inside the particular
4357
% environment, so the error checking in \end will work.
4358
%
4359
% To end an @example-like environment, we first end the paragraph (via
4360
% \afterenvbreak's vertical glue), and then the group.  That way we keep
4361
% the zero \parskip that the environments set -- \parskip glue will be
4362
% inserted at the beginning of the next paragraph in the document, after
4363
% the environment.
4364
%
4365
\def\nonfillfinish{\afterenvbreak\endgroup}
4366
 
4367
% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font.
4368
\def\lisp{\begingroup
4369
  \nonfillstart
4370
  \let\Elisp = \nonfillfinish
4371
  \tt
4372
  \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special.
4373
  \gobble       % eat return
4374
}
4375
 
4376
% @example: Same as @lisp.
4377
\def\example{\begingroup \def\Eexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
4378
 
4379
% @small... is usually equivalent to the non-small (@smallbook
4380
% redefines).  We must call \example (or whatever) last in the
4381
% definition, since it reads the return following the @example (or
4382
% whatever) command.
4383
%
4384
% This actually allows (for example) @end display inside an
4385
% @smalldisplay.  Too bad, but makeinfo will catch the error anyway.
4386
%
4387
\def\smalldisplay{\begingroup\def\Esmalldisplay{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\display}
4388
\def\smallexample{\begingroup\def\Esmallexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
4389
\def\smallformat{\begingroup\def\Esmallformat{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\format}
4390
\def\smalllisp{\begingroup\def\Esmalllisp{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
4391
 
4392
% Real @smallexample and @smalllisp (when @smallbook): use smaller fonts.
4393
% Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox.
4394
\def\smalllispx{\begingroup
4395
  \def\Esmalllisp{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
4396
  \def\Esmallexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
4397
  \smallexamplefonts
4398
  \lisp
4399
}
4400
 
4401
% @display: same as @lisp except keep current font.
4402
%
4403
\def\display{\begingroup
4404
  \nonfillstart
4405
  \let\Edisplay = \nonfillfinish
4406
  \gobble
4407
}
4408
%
4409
% @smalldisplay (when @smallbook): @display plus smaller fonts.
4410
%
4411
\def\smalldisplayx{\begingroup
4412
  \def\Esmalldisplay{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
4413
  \smallexamplefonts \rm
4414
  \display
4415
}
4416
 
4417
% @format: same as @display except don't narrow margins.
4418
%
4419
\def\format{\begingroup
4420
  \let\nonarrowing = t
4421
  \nonfillstart
4422
  \let\Eformat = \nonfillfinish
4423
  \gobble
4424
}
4425
%
4426
% @smallformat (when @smallbook): @format plus smaller fonts.
4427
%
4428
\def\smallformatx{\begingroup
4429
  \def\Esmallformat{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
4430
  \smallexamplefonts \rm
4431
  \format
4432
}
4433
 
4434
% @flushleft (same as @format).
4435
%
4436
\def\flushleft{\begingroup \def\Eflushleft{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\format}
4437
 
4438
% @flushright.
4439
%
4440
\def\flushright{\begingroup
4441
  \let\nonarrowing = t
4442
  \nonfillstart
4443
  \let\Eflushright = \nonfillfinish
4444
  \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill
4445
  \gobble
4446
}
4447
 
4448
 
4449
% @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart)
4450
% and narrows the margins.
4451
%
4452
\def\quotation{%
4453
  \begingroup\inENV %This group ends at the end of the @quotation body
4454
  {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip
4455
  \singlespace
4456
  \parindent=0pt
4457
  % We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're
4458
  % doing normal filling. So to avoid extra space below the environment...
4459
  \def\Equotation{\parskip = 0pt \nonfillfinish}%
4460
  %
4461
  % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down.
4462
  \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
4463
    \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing
4464
    \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing
4465
    \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing
4466
    \let\nonarrowing = \relax
4467
  \fi
4468
}
4469
 
4470
 
4471
% LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>}
4472
% If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter,
4473
% we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg:
4474
% `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command.  --janneke@gnu.org
4475
%
4476
% [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996.  The TeXbook.
4477
%
4478
% [Knuth] p. 344; only we need to do '@' too
4479
\def\dospecials{%
4480
  \do\ \do\\\do\@\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&%
4481
  \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~}
4482
%
4483
% [Knuth] p. 380
4484
\def\uncatcodespecials{%
4485
  \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=12}\dospecials}
4486
%
4487
% [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391
4488
% Disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font
4489
\begingroup
4490
  \catcode`\`=\active\gdef`{\relax\lq}
4491
\endgroup
4492
%
4493
% Setup for the @verb command.
4494
%
4495
% Eight spaces for a tab
4496
\begingroup
4497
  \catcode`\^^I=\active
4498
  \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }}
4499
\endgroup
4500
%
4501
\def\setupverb{%
4502
  \tt  % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
4503
  \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}%
4504
  \catcode`\`=\active
4505
  \tabeightspaces
4506
  % Respect line breaks,
4507
  % print special symbols as themselves, and
4508
  % make each space count
4509
  % must do in this order:
4510
  \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
4511
}
4512
 
4513
% Setup for the @verbatim environment
4514
%
4515
% Real tab expansion
4516
\newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount
4517
%
4518
\def\starttabbox{\setbox0=\hbox\bgroup}
4519
\begingroup
4520
  \catcode`\^^I=\active
4521
  \gdef\tabexpand{%
4522
    \catcode`\^^I=\active
4523
    \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup
4524
      \dimen0=\wd0 % the width so far, or since the previous tab
4525
      \divide\dimen0 by\tabw
4526
      \multiply\dimen0 by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw
4527
      \advance\dimen0 by\tabw  % advance to next multiple of \tabw
4528
      \wd0=\dimen0 \box0 \starttabbox
4529
    }%
4530
  }
4531
\endgroup
4532
\def\setupverbatim{%
4533
  % Easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
4534
  \tt
4535
  \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box0\endgraf}%
4536
  \catcode`\`=\active
4537
  \tabexpand
4538
  % Respect line breaks,
4539
  % print special symbols as themselves, and
4540
  % make each space count
4541
  % must do in this order:
4542
  \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
4543
  \everypar{\starttabbox}%
4544
}
4545
 
4546
% Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique
4547
% delimiter characters.  Before first delimiter expect a
4548
% right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace:
4549
%
4550
%    \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1}
4551
%
4552
% [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {}
4553
\begingroup
4554
  \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=12\catcode`\}=12
4555
  \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next]
4556
\endgroup
4557
%
4558
\def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb}
4559
%
4560
%
4561
% Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that
4562
% the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie:
4563
%
4564
%     \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1}
4565
%
4566
% For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX,
4567
% because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}':
4568
% we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'
4569
%
4570
% Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx]
4571
%% Include LaTeX hack for completeness -- never know
4572
%% \begingroup
4573
%% \catcode`|=0 \catcode`[=1
4574
%% \catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=12\catcode`\}=12\catcode`\ =\active
4575
%% \catcode`\\=12|gdef|doverbatim#1@end verbatim[
4576
%% #1|endgroup|def|Everbatim[]|end[verbatim]]
4577
%% |endgroup
4578
\begingroup
4579
  \catcode`\ =\active
4580
  \gdef\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1\end{verbatim}}
4581
\endgroup
4582
%
4583
\def\verbatim{%
4584
  \def\Everbatim{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
4585
  \begingroup
4586
    \nonfillstart
4587
    \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
4588
    \begingroup\setupverbatim\doverbatim
4589
}
4590
 
4591
% @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment.
4592
%
4593
% Allow normal characters that we make active in the argument (a file name).
4594
\def\verbatiminclude{%
4595
  \begingroup
4596
    \catcode`\\=12
4597
    \catcode`~=12
4598
    \catcode`^=12
4599
    \catcode`_=12
4600
    \catcode`|=12
4601
    \catcode`<=12
4602
    \catcode`>=12
4603
    \catcode`+=12
4604
    \parsearg\doverbatiminclude
4605
}
4606
\def\setupverbatiminclude{%
4607
  \begingroup
4608
    \nonfillstart
4609
    \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
4610
    \begingroup\setupverbatim
4611
}
4612
%
4613
\def\doverbatiminclude#1{%
4614
     % Restore active chars for included file.
4615
  \endgroup
4616
  \begingroup
4617
  \def\thisfile{#1}%
4618
  \expandafter\expandafter\setupverbatiminclude\input\thisfile
4619
  \endgroup\nonfillfinish\endgroup
4620
}
4621
 
4622
% @copying ... @end copying.
4623
% Save the text away for @insertcopying later.
4624
%
4625
\newbox\copyingbox
4626
%
4627
\def\copying{\begingroup
4628
  \parindent = 0pt  % looks wrong on title page
4629
  \def\Ecopying{\egroup\endgroup}%
4630
  \global\setbox\copyingbox = \vbox\bgroup
4631
}
4632
 
4633
% @insertcopying.
4634
%
4635
\def\insertcopying{\unvcopy\copyingbox}
4636
 
4637
 
4638
\message{defuns,}
4639
% @defun etc.
4640
 
4641
% Allow user to change definition object font (\df) internally
4642
\def\setdeffont #1 {\csname DEF#1\endcsname}
4643
 
4644
\newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in
4645
\newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt
4646
\newskip\deftypemargin \deftypemargin=12pt
4647
\newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt
4648
 
4649
\newcount\parencount
4650
% define \functionparens, which makes ( and ) and & do special things.
4651
% \functionparens affects the group it is contained in.
4652
\def\activeparens{%
4653
\catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active \catcode`\&=\active
4654
\catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active}
4655
 
4656
% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
4657
\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )
4658
 
4659
{\activeparens % Now, smart parens don't turn on until &foo (see \amprm)
4660
 
4661
% Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc.  For example,
4662
% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
4663
% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
4664
\global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen
4665
\global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack
4666
 
4667
\gdef\functionparens{\boldbrax\let&=\amprm\parencount=0 }
4668
\gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb}
4669
% This is used to turn on special parens
4670
% but make & act ordinary (given that it's active).
4671
\gdef\boldbraxnoamp{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb\let&=\ampnr}
4672
 
4673
% Definitions of (, ) and & used in args for functions.
4674
% This is the definition of ( outside of all parentheses.
4675
\gdef\oprm#1 {{\rm\char`\(}#1 \bf \let(=\opnested
4676
  \global\advance\parencount by 1
4677
}
4678
%
4679
% This is the definition of ( when already inside a level of parens.
4680
\gdef\opnested{\char`\(\global\advance\parencount by 1 }
4681
%
4682
\gdef\clrm{% Print a paren in roman if it is taking us back to depth of 0.
4683
  % also in that case restore the outer-level definition of (.
4684
  \ifnum \parencount=1 {\rm \char `\)}\sl \let(=\oprm \else \char `\) \fi
4685
  \global\advance \parencount by -1 }
4686
% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
4687
\gdef\amprm#1 {{\rm\&#1}\let(=\oprm \let)=\clrm\ }
4688
%
4689
\gdef\normalparens{\boldbrax\let&=\ampnr}
4690
} % End of definition inside \activeparens
4691
%% These parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than the
4692
%% contained text.  This is especially needed for [ and ]
4693
\def\opnr{{\sf\char`\(}\global\advance\parencount by 1 }
4694
\def\clnr{{\sf\char`\)}\global\advance\parencount by -1 }
4695
\let\ampnr = \&
4696
\def\lbrb{{\bf\char`\[}}
4697
\def\rbrb{{\bf\char`\]}}
4698
 
4699
% Active &'s sneak into the index arguments, so make sure it's defined.
4700
{
4701
  \catcode`& = 13
4702
  \global\let& = \ampnr
4703
}
4704
 
4705
% First, defname, which formats the header line itself.
4706
% #1 should be the function name.
4707
% #2 should be the type of definition, such as "Function".
4708
 
4709
\def\defname #1#2{%
4710
% Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were
4711
% outside the @def...
4712
\dimen2=\leftskip
4713
\advance\dimen2 by -\defbodyindent
4714
\noindent
4715
\setbox0=\hbox{\hskip \deflastargmargin{\rm #2}\hskip \deftypemargin}%
4716
\dimen0=\hsize \advance \dimen0 by -\wd0 % compute size for first line
4717
\dimen1=\hsize \advance \dimen1 by -\defargsindent %size for continuations
4718
\parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen1
4719
% Now output arg 2 ("Function" or some such)
4720
% ending at \deftypemargin from the right margin,
4721
% but stuck inside a box of width 0 so it does not interfere with linebreaking
4722
{% Adjust \hsize to exclude the ambient margins,
4723
% so that \rightline will obey them.
4724
\advance \hsize by -\dimen2
4725
\rlap{\rightline{{\rm #2}\hskip -1.25pc }}}%
4726
% Make all lines underfull and no complaints:
4727
\tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000
4728
\advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
4729
\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
4730
{\df #1}\enskip        % Generate function name
4731
}
4732
 
4733
% Common pieces to start any @def...
4734
% #1 is the \E... control sequence to end the definition (which we define).
4735
% #2 is the \...x control sequence (which our caller defines).
4736
% #3 is the control sequence to process the header, such as \defunheader.
4737
%
4738
\def\parsebodycommon#1#2#3{%
4739
  \begingroup\inENV
4740
  % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak,
4741
  % which is there to keep the function description together with its
4742
  % header.  But if there's nothing but headers, we want to allow a
4743
  % break after all.
4744
  \ifnum\lastpenalty = 10000 \penalty0 \fi
4745
  \medbreak
4746
  %
4747
  % Define the \E... end token that this defining construct specifies
4748
  % so that it will exit this group.
4749
  \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
4750
  %
4751
  \parindent=0in
4752
  \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
4753
  \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
4754
}
4755
 
4756
% Process body of @defun, @deffn, @defmac, etc.
4757
%
4758
\def\defparsebody#1#2#3{%
4759
  \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
4760
  \def#2{\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit#3}%
4761
  \catcode61=\active % 61 is `='
4762
  \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens
4763
  \spacesplit#3%
4764
}
4765
 
4766
% #1, #2, #3 are the common arguments (see \defparsebody).
4767
% #4, delimited by the space, is the class name.
4768
%
4769
\def\defmethparsebody#1#2#3#4 {%
4770
  \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
4771
  \def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
4772
  \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens
4773
  \spacesplit{#3{#4}}%
4774
}
4775
 
4776
% Used for @deftypemethod and @deftypeivar.
4777
% #1, #2, #3 are the common arguments (see \defparsebody).
4778
% #4, delimited by a space, is the class name.
4779
% #5 is the method's return type.
4780
%
4781
\def\deftypemethparsebody#1#2#3#4 #5 {%
4782
  \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
4783
  \def#2##1 ##2 {\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##1}{##2}}}%
4784
  \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens
4785
  \spacesplit{#3{#4}{#5}}%
4786
}
4787
 
4788
% Used for @deftypeop.  The change from \deftypemethparsebody is an
4789
% extra argument at the beginning which is the `category', instead of it
4790
% being the hardwired string `Method' or `Instance Variable'.  We have
4791
% to account for this both in the \...x definition and in parsing the
4792
% input at hand.  Thus also need a control sequence (passed as #5) for
4793
% the \E... definition to assign the category name to.
4794
%
4795
\def\deftypeopparsebody#1#2#3#4#5 #6 {%
4796
  \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
4797
  \def#2##1 ##2 ##3 {%
4798
    \def#4{##1}%
4799
    \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##2}{##3}}}%
4800
  \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens
4801
  \spacesplit{#3{#5}{#6}}%
4802
}
4803
 
4804
% For @defop.
4805
\def\defopparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {%
4806
  \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
4807
  \def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}%
4808
    \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##2}}}%
4809
  \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens
4810
  \spacesplit{#3{#5}}%
4811
}
4812
 
4813
% These parsing functions are similar to the preceding ones
4814
% except that they do not make parens into active characters.
4815
% These are used for "variables" since they have no arguments.
4816
%
4817
\def\defvarparsebody #1#2#3{%
4818
  \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
4819
  \def#2{\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit#3}%
4820
  \catcode61=\active %
4821
  \begingroup\obeylines
4822
  \spacesplit#3%
4823
}
4824
 
4825
% @defopvar.
4826
\def\defopvarparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {%
4827
  \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
4828
  \def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}%
4829
    \begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##2}}}%
4830
  \begingroup\obeylines
4831
  \spacesplit{#3{#5}}%
4832
}
4833
 
4834
\def\defvrparsebody#1#2#3#4 {%
4835
  \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
4836
  \def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
4837
  \begingroup\obeylines
4838
  \spacesplit{#3{#4}}%
4839
}
4840
 
4841
% This loses on `@deftp {Data Type} {struct termios}' -- it thinks the
4842
% type is just `struct', because we lose the braces in `{struct
4843
% termios}' when \spacesplit reads its undelimited argument.  Sigh.
4844
% \let\deftpparsebody=\defvrparsebody
4845
%
4846
% So, to get around this, we put \empty in with the type name.  That
4847
% way, TeX won't find exactly `{...}' as an undelimited argument, and
4848
% won't strip off the braces.
4849
%
4850
\def\deftpparsebody #1#2#3#4 {%
4851
  \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
4852
  \def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
4853
  \begingroup\obeylines
4854
  \spacesplit{\parsetpheaderline{#3{#4}}}\empty
4855
}
4856
 
4857
% Fine, but then we have to eventually remove the \empty *and* the
4858
% braces (if any).  That's what this does.
4859
%
4860
\def\removeemptybraces\empty#1\relax{#1}
4861
 
4862
% After \spacesplit has done its work, this is called -- #1 is the final
4863
% thing to call, #2 the type name (which starts with \empty), and #3
4864
% (which might be empty) the arguments.
4865
%
4866
\def\parsetpheaderline#1#2#3{%
4867
  #1{\removeemptybraces#2\relax}{#3}%
4868
}%
4869
 
4870
% Split up #2 at the first space token.
4871
% call #1 with two arguments:
4872
%  the first is all of #2 before the space token,
4873
%  the second is all of #2 after that space token.
4874
% If #2 contains no space token, all of it is passed as the first arg
4875
% and the second is passed as empty.
4876
%
4877
{\obeylines
4878
\gdef\spacesplit#1#2^^M{\endgroup\spacesplitfoo{#1}#2 \relax\spacesplitfoo}%
4879
\long\gdef\spacesplitfoo#1#2 #3#4\spacesplitfoo{%
4880
\ifx\relax #3%
4881
#1{#2}{}\else #1{#2}{#3#4}\fi}}
4882
 
4883
% Define @defun.
4884
 
4885
% First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of \defun
4886
% Use this to expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up
4887
 
4888
\def\defunargs#1{\functionparens \sl
4889
% Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars.
4890
% Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar.
4891
% Set the font temporarily and use \font in case \setfont made \tensl a macro.
4892
{\tensl\hyphenchar\font=0}%
4893
#1%
4894
{\tensl\hyphenchar\font=45}%
4895
\ifnum\parencount=0 \else \errmessage{Unbalanced parentheses in @def}\fi%
4896
\interlinepenalty=10000
4897
\advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
4898
\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
4899
}
4900
 
4901
\def\deftypefunargs #1{%
4902
% Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars.
4903
% Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar.
4904
% Use \boldbraxnoamp, not \functionparens, so that & is not special.
4905
\boldbraxnoamp
4906
\tclose{#1}% avoid \code because of side effects on active chars
4907
\interlinepenalty=10000
4908
\advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
4909
\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
4910
}
4911
 
4912
% Do complete processing of one @defun or @defunx line already parsed.
4913
 
4914
% @deffn Command forward-char nchars
4915
 
4916
\def\deffn{\defmethparsebody\Edeffn\deffnx\deffnheader}
4917
 
4918
\def\deffnheader #1#2#3{\doind {fn}{\code{#2}}%
4919
\begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defunargs{#3}\endgroup %
4920
\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
4921
}
4922
 
4923
% @defun == @deffn Function
4924
 
4925
\def\defun{\defparsebody\Edefun\defunx\defunheader}
4926
 
4927
\def\defunheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
4928
\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDeffunc}%
4929
\defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
4930
\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
4931
}
4932
 
4933
% @deftypefun int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar})
4934
 
4935
\def\deftypefun{\defparsebody\Edeftypefun\deftypefunx\deftypefunheader}
4936
 
4937
% #1 is the data type.  #2 is the name and args.
4938
\def\deftypefunheader #1#2{\deftypefunheaderx{#1}#2 \relax}
4939
% #1 is the data type, #2 the name, #3 the args.
4940
\def\deftypefunheaderx #1#2 #3\relax{%
4941
\doind {fn}{\code{#2}}% Make entry in function index
4942
\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$.$#2}{\putwordDeftypefun}%
4943
\deftypefunargs {#3}\endgroup %
4944
\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
4945
}
4946
 
4947
% @deftypefn {Library Function} int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar})
4948
 
4949
\def\deftypefn{\defmethparsebody\Edeftypefn\deftypefnx\deftypefnheader}
4950
 
4951
% \defheaderxcond#1\relax$.$
4952
% puts #1 in @code, followed by a space, but does nothing if #1 is null.
4953
\def\defheaderxcond#1#2$.${\ifx#1\relax\else\code{#1#2} \fi}
4954
 
4955
% #1 is the classification.  #2 is the data type.  #3 is the name and args.
4956
\def\deftypefnheader #1#2#3{\deftypefnheaderx{#1}{#2}#3 \relax}
4957
% #1 is the classification, #2 the data type, #3 the name, #4 the args.
4958
\def\deftypefnheaderx #1#2#3 #4\relax{%
4959
\doind {fn}{\code{#3}}% Make entry in function index
4960
\begingroup
4961
\normalparens % notably, turn off `&' magic, which prevents
4962
%               at least some C++ text from working
4963
\defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}{#1}%
4964
\deftypefunargs {#4}\endgroup %
4965
\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
4966
}
4967
 
4968
% @defmac == @deffn Macro
4969
 
4970
\def\defmac{\defparsebody\Edefmac\defmacx\defmacheader}
4971
 
4972
\def\defmacheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
4973
\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefmac}%
4974
\defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
4975
\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
4976
}
4977
 
4978
% @defspec == @deffn Special Form
4979
 
4980
\def\defspec{\defparsebody\Edefspec\defspecx\defspecheader}
4981
 
4982
\def\defspecheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
4983
\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefspec}%
4984
\defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
4985
\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
4986
}
4987
 
4988
% @defop CATEGORY CLASS OPERATION ARG...
4989
%
4990
\def\defop #1 {\def\defoptype{#1}%
4991
\defopparsebody\Edefop\defopx\defopheader\defoptype}
4992
%
4993
\def\defopheader#1#2#3{%
4994
\dosubind {fn}{\code{#2}}{\putwordon\ #1}% Make entry in function index
4995
\begingroup\defname {#2}{\defoptype\ \putwordon\ #1}%
4996
\defunargs {#3}\endgroup %
4997
}
4998
 
4999
% @deftypeop CATEGORY CLASS TYPE OPERATION ARG...
5000
%
5001
\def\deftypeop #1 {\def\deftypeopcategory{#1}%
5002
  \deftypeopparsebody\Edeftypeop\deftypeopx\deftypeopheader
5003
                       \deftypeopcategory}
5004
%
5005
% #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the operation name, #4 the args.
5006
\def\deftypeopheader#1#2#3#4{%
5007
  \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
5008
  \begingroup
5009
    \defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}
5010
            {\deftypeopcategory\ \putwordon\ \code{#1}}%
5011
    \deftypefunargs{#4}%
5012
  \endgroup
5013
}
5014
 
5015
% @deftypemethod CLASS TYPE METHOD ARG...
5016
%
5017
\def\deftypemethod{%
5018
  \deftypemethparsebody\Edeftypemethod\deftypemethodx\deftypemethodheader}
5019
%
5020
% #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the method name, #4 the args.
5021
\def\deftypemethodheader#1#2#3#4{%
5022
  \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
5023
  \begingroup
5024
    \defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}{\putwordMethodon\ \code{#1}}%
5025
    \deftypefunargs{#4}%
5026
  \endgroup
5027
}
5028
 
5029
% @deftypeivar CLASS TYPE VARNAME
5030
%
5031
\def\deftypeivar{%
5032
  \deftypemethparsebody\Edeftypeivar\deftypeivarx\deftypeivarheader}
5033
%
5034
% #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the variable name.
5035
\def\deftypeivarheader#1#2#3{%
5036
  \dosubind{vr}{\code{#3}}{\putwordof\ \code{#1}}% entry in variable index
5037
  \begingroup
5038
    \defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}
5039
            {\putwordInstanceVariableof\ \code{#1}}%
5040
    \defvarargs{#3}%
5041
  \endgroup
5042
}
5043
 
5044
% @defmethod == @defop Method
5045
%
5046
\def\defmethod{\defmethparsebody\Edefmethod\defmethodx\defmethodheader}
5047
%
5048
% #1 is the class name, #2 the method name, #3 the args.
5049
\def\defmethodheader#1#2#3{%
5050
  \dosubind{fn}{\code{#2}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
5051
  \begingroup
5052
    \defname{#2}{\putwordMethodon\ \code{#1}}%
5053
    \defunargs{#3}%
5054
  \endgroup
5055
}
5056
 
5057
% @defcv {Class Option} foo-class foo-flag
5058
 
5059
\def\defcv #1 {\def\defcvtype{#1}%
5060
\defopvarparsebody\Edefcv\defcvx\defcvarheader\defcvtype}
5061
 
5062
\def\defcvarheader #1#2#3{%
5063
\dosubind {vr}{\code{#2}}{\putwordof\ #1}% Make entry in var index
5064
\begingroup\defname {#2}{\defcvtype\ \putwordof\ #1}%
5065
\defvarargs {#3}\endgroup %
5066
}
5067
 
5068
% @defivar CLASS VARNAME == @defcv {Instance Variable} CLASS VARNAME
5069
%
5070
\def\defivar{\defvrparsebody\Edefivar\defivarx\defivarheader}
5071
%
5072
\def\defivarheader#1#2#3{%
5073
  \dosubind {vr}{\code{#2}}{\putwordof\ #1}% entry in var index
5074
  \begingroup
5075
    \defname{#2}{\putwordInstanceVariableof\ #1}%
5076
    \defvarargs{#3}%
5077
  \endgroup
5078
}
5079
 
5080
% @defvar
5081
% First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of @defvar.
5082
% This is actually simple: just print them in roman.
5083
% This must expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up
5084
\def\defvarargs #1{\normalparens #1%
5085
\interlinepenalty=10000
5086
\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak}
5087
 
5088
% @defvr Counter foo-count
5089
 
5090
\def\defvr{\defvrparsebody\Edefvr\defvrx\defvrheader}
5091
 
5092
\def\defvrheader #1#2#3{\doind {vr}{\code{#2}}%
5093
\begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defvarargs{#3}\endgroup}
5094
 
5095
% @defvar == @defvr Variable
5096
 
5097
\def\defvar{\defvarparsebody\Edefvar\defvarx\defvarheader}
5098
 
5099
\def\defvarheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index
5100
\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefvar}%
5101
\defvarargs {#2}\endgroup %
5102
}
5103
 
5104
% @defopt == @defvr {User Option}
5105
 
5106
\def\defopt{\defvarparsebody\Edefopt\defoptx\defoptheader}
5107
 
5108
\def\defoptheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index
5109
\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefopt}%
5110
\defvarargs {#2}\endgroup %
5111
}
5112
 
5113
% @deftypevar int foobar
5114
 
5115
\def\deftypevar{\defvarparsebody\Edeftypevar\deftypevarx\deftypevarheader}
5116
 
5117
% #1 is the data type.  #2 is the name, perhaps followed by text that
5118
% is actually part of the data type, which should not be put into the index.
5119
\def\deftypevarheader #1#2{%
5120
\dovarind#2 \relax% Make entry in variables index
5121
\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$.$#2}{\putwordDeftypevar}%
5122
\interlinepenalty=10000
5123
\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
5124
\endgroup}
5125
\def\dovarind#1 #2\relax{\doind{vr}{\code{#1}}}
5126
 
5127
% @deftypevr {Global Flag} int enable
5128
 
5129
\def\deftypevr{\defvrparsebody\Edeftypevr\deftypevrx\deftypevrheader}
5130
 
5131
\def\deftypevrheader #1#2#3{\dovarind#3 \relax%
5132
\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}{#1}
5133
\interlinepenalty=10000
5134
\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
5135
\endgroup}
5136
 
5137
% Now define @deftp
5138
% Args are printed in bold, a slight difference from @defvar.
5139
 
5140
\def\deftpargs #1{\bf \defvarargs{#1}}
5141
 
5142
% @deftp Class window height width ...
5143
 
5144
\def\deftp{\deftpparsebody\Edeftp\deftpx\deftpheader}
5145
 
5146
\def\deftpheader #1#2#3{\doind {tp}{\code{#2}}%
5147
\begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\deftpargs{#3}\endgroup}
5148
 
5149
% These definitions are used if you use @defunx (etc.)
5150
% anywhere other than immediately after a @defun or @defunx.
5151
%
5152
\def\defcvx#1 {\errmessage{@defcvx in invalid context}}
5153
\def\deffnx#1 {\errmessage{@deffnx in invalid context}}
5154
\def\defivarx#1 {\errmessage{@defivarx in invalid context}}
5155
\def\defmacx#1 {\errmessage{@defmacx in invalid context}}
5156
\def\defmethodx#1 {\errmessage{@defmethodx in invalid context}}
5157
\def\defoptx #1 {\errmessage{@defoptx in invalid context}}
5158
\def\defopx#1 {\errmessage{@defopx in invalid context}}
5159
\def\defspecx#1 {\errmessage{@defspecx in invalid context}}
5160
\def\deftpx#1 {\errmessage{@deftpx in invalid context}}
5161
\def\deftypefnx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypefnx in invalid context}}
5162
\def\deftypefunx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypefunx in invalid context}}
5163
\def\deftypeivarx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypeivarx in invalid context}}
5164
\def\deftypemethodx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypemethodx in invalid context}}
5165
\def\deftypeopx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypeopx in invalid context}}
5166
\def\deftypevarx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypevarx in invalid context}}
5167
\def\deftypevrx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypevrx in invalid context}}
5168
\def\defunx#1 {\errmessage{@defunx in invalid context}}
5169
\def\defvarx#1 {\errmessage{@defvarx in invalid context}}
5170
\def\defvrx#1 {\errmessage{@defvrx in invalid context}}
5171
 
5172
 
5173
\message{macros,}
5174
% @macro.
5175
 
5176
% To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens,
5177
% which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX.
5178
\ifx\eTeXversion\undefined
5179
 \newwrite\macscribble
5180
 \def\scanmacro#1{%
5181
   \begingroup \newlinechar`\^^M
5182
   % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
5183
   \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=12 \escapechar=`\@
5184
   % Append \endinput to make sure that TeX does not see the ending newline.
5185
   \toks0={#1\endinput}%
5186
   \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp
5187
   \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}%
5188
   \immediate\closeout\macscribble
5189
   \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces
5190
   \input \jobname.tmp
5191
   \endgroup
5192
}
5193
\else
5194
\def\scanmacro#1{%
5195
\begingroup \newlinechar`\^^M
5196
% Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
5197
\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=12 \escapechar=`\@
5198
\let\xeatspaces\eatspaces\scantokens{#1\endinput}\endgroup}
5199
\fi
5200
 
5201
\newcount\paramno   % Count of parameters
5202
\newtoks\macname    % Macro name
5203
\newif\ifrecursive  % Is it recursive?
5204
\def\macrolist{}    % List of all defined macros in the form
5205
                    % \do\macro1\do\macro2...
5206
 
5207
% Utility routines.
5208
% Thisdoes \let #1 = #2, except with \csnames.
5209
\def\cslet#1#2{%
5210
\expandafter\expandafter
5211
\expandafter\let
5212
\expandafter\expandafter
5213
\csname#1\endcsname
5214
\csname#2\endcsname}
5215
 
5216
% Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string.
5217
% Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN).
5218
{\catcode`\@=11
5219
\gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }}
5220
\gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@}
5221
\gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @}
5222
\def\unbrace#1{#1}
5223
\unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1}
5224
}
5225
 
5226
% Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string.
5227
{\catcode`\^^M=12\catcode`\Q=3%
5228
\gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}%
5229
\gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}%
5230
\gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}%
5231
}
5232
 
5233
% Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where
5234
% all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active
5235
% (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \.
5236
 
5237
% It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is
5238
% done by  making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro
5239
% body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro.
5240
 
5241
\def\macrobodyctxt{%
5242
  \catcode`\~=12
5243
  \catcode`\^=12
5244
  \catcode`\_=12
5245
  \catcode`\|=12
5246
  \catcode`\<=12
5247
  \catcode`\>=12
5248
  \catcode`\+=12
5249
  \catcode`\{=12
5250
  \catcode`\}=12
5251
  \catcode`\@=12
5252
  \catcode`\^^M=12
5253
  \usembodybackslash}
5254
 
5255
\def\macroargctxt{%
5256
  \catcode`\~=12
5257
  \catcode`\^=12
5258
  \catcode`\_=12
5259
  \catcode`\|=12
5260
  \catcode`\<=12
5261
  \catcode`\>=12
5262
  \catcode`\+=12
5263
  \catcode`\@=12
5264
  \catcode`\\=12}
5265
 
5266
% \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies.
5267
% It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N
5268
% where N is the macro parameter number.
5269
% We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so
5270
% \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash.
5271
 
5272
{\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active
5273
 @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash}
5274
 @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname}
5275
}
5276
\expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash}
5277
 
5278
\def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx}
5279
\def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx}
5280
 
5281
\def\macroxxx#1{%
5282
  \getargs{#1}%           now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist
5283
  \ifx\argl\empty       % no arguments
5284
     \paramno=0%
5285
  \else
5286
     \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;%
5287
  \fi
5288
  \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname
5289
     \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}%
5290
  \else
5291
     \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax
5292
     \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi
5293
     \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}%
5294
     \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1%
5295
     % Add the macroname to \macrolist
5296
     \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\do}%
5297
     \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0
5298
       \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname\endcsname}%
5299
  \fi
5300
  \begingroup \macrobodyctxt
5301
  \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody
5302
  \else \expandafter\parsemacbody
5303
  \fi}
5304
 
5305
\def\unmacro{\parsearg\unmacroxxx}
5306
\def\unmacroxxx#1{%
5307
  \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname
5308
    \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}%
5309
    \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0%
5310
    % Remove the macro name from \macrolist
5311
    \begingroup
5312
      \edef\tempa{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}%
5313
      \def\do##1{%
5314
        \def\tempb{##1}%
5315
        \ifx\tempa\tempb
5316
          % remove this
5317
        \else
5318
          \toks0 = \expandafter{\newmacrolist\do}%
5319
          \edef\newmacrolist{\the\toks0\expandafter\noexpand\tempa}%
5320
        \fi}%
5321
      \def\newmacrolist{}%
5322
      % Execute macro list to define \newmacrolist
5323
      \macrolist
5324
      \global\let\macrolist\newmacrolist
5325
    \endgroup
5326
  \else
5327
    \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}%
5328
  \fi
5329
}
5330
 
5331
% This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a
5332
% <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by
5333
% an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed.
5334
\def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}}
5335
\def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs}
5336
\def\getmacname #1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}}
5337
\def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}}
5338
 
5339
% Parse the optional {params} list.  Set up \paramno and \paramlist
5340
% so \defmacro knows what to do.  Define \macarg.blah for each blah
5341
% in the params list, to be ##N where N is the position in that list.
5342
% That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above).
5343
 
5344
% We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions.
5345
% The technique used is stolen from LaTeX:  let \hash be something
5346
% unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine
5347
% it to # just before using the token list produced.
5348
%
5349
% The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before
5350
% the macro is used.
5351
 
5352
\def\parsemargdef#1;{\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}%
5353
        \let\hash\relax\let\xeatspaces\relax\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,}
5354
\def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{%
5355
  \if#1;\let\next=\relax
5356
  \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx
5357
    \advance\paramno by 1%
5358
    \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname
5359
        {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}%
5360
    \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}%
5361
  \fi\next}
5362
 
5363
% These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies.
5364
% (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.)
5365
 
5366
\long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro%
5367
{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
5368
\long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro%
5369
{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
5370
 
5371
% This defines the macro itself. There are six cases: recursive and
5372
% nonrecursive macros of zero, one, and many arguments.
5373
% Much magic with \expandafter here.
5374
% \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file
5375
% they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group.
5376
\def\defmacro{%
5377
  \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars
5378
  \ifrecursive
5379
    \ifcase\paramno
5380
    % 0
5381
      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
5382
        \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
5383
    \or % 1
5384
      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
5385
         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
5386
         \noexpand\braceorline
5387
         \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
5388
      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
5389
         \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
5390
    \else % many
5391
      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
5392
         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
5393
         \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
5394
      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
5395
          \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
5396
      \expandafter\expandafter
5397
      \expandafter\xdef
5398
      \expandafter\expandafter
5399
        \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
5400
          \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
5401
    \fi
5402
  \else
5403
    \ifcase\paramno
5404
    % 0
5405
      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
5406
        \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
5407
        \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
5408
    \or % 1
5409
      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
5410
         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
5411
         \noexpand\braceorline
5412
         \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
5413
      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
5414
        \egroup
5415
        \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
5416
        \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
5417
    \else % many
5418
      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
5419
         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
5420
         \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
5421
      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
5422
          \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
5423
      \expandafter\expandafter
5424
      \expandafter\xdef
5425
      \expandafter\expandafter
5426
      \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
5427
      \paramlist{%
5428
          \egroup
5429
          \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
5430
          \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
5431
    \fi
5432
  \fi}
5433
 
5434
\def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}}
5435
 
5436
% \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a
5437
% {.  If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole
5438
% line.  Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence
5439
% as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg)
5440
\def\braceorline#1{\let\next=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx}
5441
\def\braceorlinexxx{%
5442
  \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else
5443
    \expandafter\parsearg
5444
  \fi \next}
5445
 
5446
% We mant to disable all macros during \shipout so that they are not
5447
% expanded by \write.
5448
\def\turnoffmacros{\begingroup \def\do##1{\let\noexpand##1=\relax}%
5449
  \edef\next{\macrolist}\expandafter\endgroup\next}
5450
 
5451
 
5452
% @alias.
5453
% We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal
5454
% sign.  Just make them active and then expand them all to nothing.
5455
\def\alias{\begingroup\obeyspaces\parsearg\aliasxxx}
5456
\def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax}
5457
\def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{\ignoreactivespaces
5458
\edef\next{\global\let\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname=%
5459
           \expandafter\noexpand\csname#2\endcsname}%
5460
\expandafter\endgroup\next}
5461
 
5462
 
5463
\message{cross references,}
5464
% @xref etc.
5465
 
5466
\newwrite\auxfile
5467
 
5468
\newif\ifhavexrefs    % True if xref values are known.
5469
\newif\ifwarnedxrefs  % True if we warned once that they aren't known.
5470
 
5471
% @inforef is relatively simple.
5472
\def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**}
5473
\def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}},
5474
  node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}}
5475
 
5476
% @node's job is to define \lastnode.
5477
\def\node{\ENVcheck\parsearg\nodezzz}
5478
\def\nodezzz#1{\nodexxx [#1,]}
5479
\def\nodexxx[#1,#2]{\gdef\lastnode{#1}}
5480
\let\nwnode=\node
5481
\let\lastnode=\relax
5482
 
5483
% The sectioning commands (@chapter, etc.) call these.
5484
\def\donoderef{%
5485
  \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
5486
    \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}%
5487
      {Ysectionnumberandtype}%
5488
    \global\let\lastnode=\relax
5489
  \fi
5490
}
5491
\def\unnumbnoderef{%
5492
  \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
5493
    \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}{Ynothing}%
5494
    \global\let\lastnode=\relax
5495
  \fi
5496
}
5497
\def\appendixnoderef{%
5498
  \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
5499
    \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}%
5500
      {Yappendixletterandtype}%
5501
    \global\let\lastnode=\relax
5502
  \fi
5503
}
5504
 
5505
 
5506
% @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point.
5507
%
5508
\newcount\savesfregister
5509
\gdef\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi}
5510
\gdef\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi}
5511
\gdef\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces}
5512
 
5513
% \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME, namely
5514
% NAME-title, NAME-pg, and NAME-SNT.  Called from \foonoderef.  We have
5515
% to set \indexdummies so commands such as @code in a section title
5516
% aren't expanded.  It would be nicer not to expand the titles in the
5517
% first place, but there's so many layers that that is hard to do.
5518
%
5519
\def\setref#1#2{{%
5520
  \indexdummies
5521
  \pdfmkdest{#1}%
5522
  \dosetq{#1-title}{Ytitle}%
5523
  \dosetq{#1-pg}{Ypagenumber}%
5524
  \dosetq{#1-snt}{#2}%
5525
}}
5526
 
5527
% @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references.  For \xrefX, #1 is
5528
% the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed
5529
% node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed
5530
% manual.  All but the node name can be omitted.
5531
%
5532
\def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
5533
\def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
5534
\def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
5535
\def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup
5536
  \unsepspaces
5537
  \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}%
5538
  \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #3}%
5539
  \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual}%
5540
  \setbox0=\hbox{\printednodename}%
5541
  \ifdim \wd0 = 0pt
5542
    % No printed node name was explicitly given.
5543
    \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax
5544
      % Use the node name inside the square brackets.
5545
      \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
5546
    \else
5547
      % Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside
5548
      % the square brackets.  Use the real section title if we have it.
5549
      \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
5550
        % It is in another manual, so we don't have it.
5551
        \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
5552
      \else
5553
        \ifhavexrefs
5554
          % We know the real title if we have the xref values.
5555
          \def\printednodename{\refx{#1-title}{}}%
5556
        \else
5557
          % Otherwise just copy the Info node name.
5558
          \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
5559
        \fi%
5560
      \fi
5561
    \fi
5562
  \fi
5563
  %
5564
  % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not
5565
  % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will
5566
  % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names.  Since some manuals
5567
  % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this
5568
  % is a loss.  Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it
5569
  % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
5570
  \ifpdf
5571
    \leavevmode
5572
    \getfilename{#4}%
5573
    {\normalturnoffactive
5574
     \ifnum\filenamelength>0
5575
       \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
5576
         goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{#1}%
5577
     \else
5578
       \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
5579
         goto name{#1}%
5580
     \fi
5581
    }%
5582
    \linkcolor
5583
  \fi
5584
  %
5585
  \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
5586
    \putwordsection{} ``\printednodename'' \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
5587
  \else
5588
    % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the
5589
    % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand
5590
    % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of
5591
    % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the
5592
    % printing, back off for the \refx-pg.
5593
    {\normalturnoffactive
5594
     % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for
5595
     % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be.
5596
     \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}%
5597
     \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi
5598
    }%
5599
    % [mynode],
5600
    [\printednodename],\space
5601
    % page 3
5602
    \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}%
5603
  \fi
5604
  \endlink
5605
\endgroup}
5606
 
5607
% \dosetq is the interface for calls from other macros
5608
 
5609
% Use \normalturnoffactive so that punctuation chars such as underscore
5610
% and backslash work in node names.  (\turnoffactive doesn't do \.)
5611
\def\dosetq#1#2{%
5612
  {\let\folio=0%
5613
   \normalturnoffactive
5614
   \edef\next{\write\auxfile{\internalsetq{#1}{#2}}}%
5615
   \iflinks
5616
     \next
5617
   \fi
5618
  }%
5619
}
5620
 
5621
% \internalsetq {foo}{page} expands into
5622
% CHARACTERS 'xrdef {foo}{...expansion of \Ypage...}
5623
% When the aux file is read, ' is the escape character
5624
 
5625
\def\internalsetq #1#2{'xrdef {#1}{\csname #2\endcsname}}
5626
 
5627
% Things to be expanded by \internalsetq
5628
 
5629
\def\Ypagenumber{\folio}
5630
 
5631
\def\Ytitle{\thissection}
5632
 
5633
\def\Ynothing{}
5634
 
5635
\def\Ysectionnumberandtype{%
5636
\ifnum\secno=0 \putwordChapter\xreftie\the\chapno %
5637
\else \ifnum \subsecno=0 \putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno %
5638
\else \ifnum \subsubsecno=0 %
5639
\putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno %
5640
\else %
5641
\putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno %
5642
\fi \fi \fi }
5643
 
5644
\def\Yappendixletterandtype{%
5645
\ifnum\secno=0 \putwordAppendix\xreftie'char\the\appendixno{}%
5646
\else \ifnum \subsecno=0 \putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno %
5647
\else \ifnum \subsubsecno=0 %
5648
\putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno %
5649
\else %
5650
\putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno %
5651
\fi \fi \fi }
5652
 
5653
\gdef\xreftie{'tie}
5654
 
5655
% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
5656
% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
5657
%
5658
\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
5659
  \let\linenumber = \empty % Non-3.0.
5660
\else
5661
  \def\linenumber{\the\inputlineno:\space}
5662
\fi
5663
 
5664
% Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME.
5665
% If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward.
5666
 
5667
\def\refx#1#2{%
5668
  \expandafter\ifx\csname X#1\endcsname\relax
5669
    % If not defined, say something at least.
5670
    \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright
5671
    \iflinks
5672
      \ifhavexrefs
5673
        \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}%
5674
      \else
5675
        \ifwarnedxrefs\else
5676
          \global\warnedxrefstrue
5677
          \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}%
5678
        \fi
5679
      \fi
5680
    \fi
5681
  \else
5682
    % It's defined, so just use it.
5683
    \csname X#1\endcsname
5684
  \fi
5685
  #2% Output the suffix in any case.
5686
}
5687
 
5688
% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file.
5689
%
5690
\def\xrdef#1{\begingroup
5691
  % Reenable \ as an escape while reading the second argument.
5692
  \catcode`\\ = 0
5693
  \afterassignment\endgroup
5694
  \expandafter\gdef\csname X#1\endcsname
5695
}
5696
 
5697
% Read the last existing aux file, if any.  No error if none exists.
5698
\def\readauxfile{\begingroup
5699
  \catcode`\^^@=\other
5700
  \catcode`\^^A=\other
5701
  \catcode`\^^B=\other
5702
  \catcode`\^^C=\other
5703
  \catcode`\^^D=\other
5704
  \catcode`\^^E=\other
5705
  \catcode`\^^F=\other
5706
  \catcode`\^^G=\other
5707
  \catcode`\^^H=\other
5708
  \catcode`\^^K=\other
5709
  \catcode`\^^L=\other
5710
  \catcode`\^^N=\other
5711
  \catcode`\^^P=\other
5712
  \catcode`\^^Q=\other
5713
  \catcode`\^^R=\other
5714
  \catcode`\^^S=\other
5715
  \catcode`\^^T=\other
5716
  \catcode`\^^U=\other
5717
  \catcode`\^^V=\other
5718
  \catcode`\^^W=\other
5719
  \catcode`\^^X=\other
5720
  \catcode`\^^Z=\other
5721
  \catcode`\^^[=\other
5722
  \catcode`\^^\=\other
5723
  \catcode`\^^]=\other
5724
  \catcode`\^^^=\other
5725
  \catcode`\^^_=\other
5726
  \catcode`\@=\other
5727
  \catcode`\^=\other
5728
  % It was suggested to define this as 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc.
5729
  % in xref tags, i.e., node names.  But since ^^e4 notation isn't
5730
  % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable.  Furthermore,
5731
  % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^
5732
  % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat
5733
  % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first
5734
  % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence.  It could
5735
  % all be worked out, but why?  Either we support ^^ or we don't.
5736
  %
5737
  % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat:
5738
  % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter
5739
  % and then to call \auxhat in \setq.
5740
  %
5741
  \catcode`\~=\other
5742
  \catcode`\[=\other
5743
  \catcode`\]=\other
5744
  \catcode`\"=\other
5745
  \catcode`\_=\other
5746
  \catcode`\|=\other
5747
  \catcode`\<=\other
5748
  \catcode`\>=\other
5749
  \catcode`\$=\other
5750
  \catcode`\#=\other
5751
  \catcode`\&=\other
5752
  \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off
5753
  % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters
5754
  {%
5755
    \count 1=128
5756
    \def\loop{%
5757
      \catcode\count 1=\other
5758
      \advance\count 1 by 1
5759
      \ifnum \count 1<256 \loop \fi
5760
    }%
5761
  }%
5762
  % The aux file uses ' as the escape (for now).
5763
  % Turn off \ as an escape so we do not lose on
5764
  % entries which were dumped with control sequences in their names.
5765
  % For example, 'xrdef {$\leq $-fun}{page ...} made by @defun ^^
5766
  % Reference to such entries still does not work the way one would wish,
5767
  % but at least they do not bomb out when the aux file is read in.
5768
  \catcode`\{=1
5769
  \catcode`\}=2
5770
  \catcode`\%=\other
5771
  \catcode`\'=0
5772
  \catcode`\\=\other
5773
  %
5774
  \openin 1 \jobname.aux
5775
  \ifeof 1 \else
5776
    \closein 1
5777
    \input \jobname.aux
5778
    \global\havexrefstrue
5779
    \global\warnedobstrue
5780
  \fi
5781
  % Open the new aux file.  TeX will close it automatically at exit.
5782
  \openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
5783
\endgroup}
5784
 
5785
 
5786
% Footnotes.
5787
 
5788
\newcount \footnoteno
5789
 
5790
% The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is
5791
% vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a
5792
% pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is
5793
% removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a
5794
% space to prevent strange expansion errors.)
5795
\def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 }
5796
 
5797
% @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only.
5798
\let\footnotestyle=\comment
5799
 
5800
\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
5801
 
5802
{\catcode `\@=11
5803
%
5804
% Auto-number footnotes.  Otherwise like plain.
5805
\gdef\footnote{%
5806
  \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne
5807
  \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}%
5808
  %
5809
  % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the
5810
  % extra spacing after we do the footnote number.
5811
  \let\@sf\empty
5812
  \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\/\fi
5813
  %
5814
  % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number.
5815
  \unskip
5816
  \thisfootno\@sf
5817
  \footnotezzz
5818
}%
5819
 
5820
% Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the
5821
% footnote text as a parameter.  Our footnotes don't need to be so general.
5822
%
5823
% Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset and anything else that uses
5824
% \parseargline fail inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when
5825
% the footnote is read.  --karl, 16nov96.
5826
%
5827
\long\gdef\footnotezzz{\insert\footins\bgroup
5828
  % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the
5829
  % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment.
5830
  % So reset some parameters.
5831
  \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
5832
  \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes
5833
  \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox
5834
  \floatingpenalty\@MM
5835
  \leftskip\z@skip
5836
  \rightskip\z@skip
5837
  \spaceskip\z@skip
5838
  \xspaceskip\z@skip
5839
  \parindent\defaultparindent
5840
  %
5841
  \smallfonts \rm
5842
  %
5843
  % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears
5844
  % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op.  makeinfo does not use
5845
  % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote
5846
  % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style).
5847
  \let\noindent = \relax
5848
  %
5849
  % Hang the footnote text off the number.  Use \everypar in case the
5850
  % footnote extends for more than one paragraph.
5851
  \everypar = {\hang}%
5852
  \textindent{\thisfootno}%
5853
  %
5854
  % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text.  Since this
5855
  % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it
5856
  % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote.
5857
  \footstrut
5858
  \futurelet\next\fo@t
5859
}
5860
\def\fo@t{\ifcat\bgroup\noexpand\next \let\next\f@@t
5861
  \else\let\next\f@t\fi \next}
5862
\def\f@@t{\bgroup\aftergroup\@foot\let\next}
5863
\def\f@t#1{#1\@foot}
5864
\def\@foot{\strut\par\egroup}
5865
 
5866
}%end \catcode `\@=11
5867
 
5868
% @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line.  It should
5869
% surround any changed text.  This approach does *not* work if the
5870
% change spans more than two lines of output.  To handle that, we would
5871
% have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main
5872
% vertical list for the beginning and end of each change).
5873
%
5874
\def\|{%
5875
  % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode.
5876
  \leavevmode
5877
  %
5878
  % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output.
5879
  \vadjust{%
5880
    % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current
5881
    % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record.
5882
    \vskip-\baselineskip
5883
    %
5884
    % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type.  So
5885
    % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin.
5886
    \llap{%
5887
      %
5888
      % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'.
5889
      \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt
5890
      %
5891
      % This is the space between the bar and the text.
5892
      \hskip 12pt
5893
    }%
5894
  }%
5895
}
5896
 
5897
% For a final copy, take out the rectangles
5898
% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
5899
% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
5900
%
5901
\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt}
5902
 
5903
% @image.  We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this.
5904
% If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain.
5905
%
5906
% Check for and read epsf.tex up front.  If we read it only at @image
5907
% time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get
5908
% undone and the next image would fail.
5909
\openin 1 = epsf.tex
5910
\ifeof 1 \else
5911
  \closein 1
5912
  % Do not bother showing banner with post-v2.7 epsf.tex (available in
5913
  % doc/epsf.tex until it shows up on ctan).
5914
  \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }%
5915
  \input epsf.tex
5916
\fi
5917
%
5918
% We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex.
5919
\newif\ifwarnednoepsf
5920
\newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to
5921
  work.  It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get
5922
  it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.}
5923
%
5924
\def\image#1{%
5925
  \ifx\epsfbox\undefined
5926
    \ifwarnednoepsf \else
5927
      \errhelp = \noepsfhelp
5928
      \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}%
5929
      \global\warnednoepsftrue
5930
    \fi
5931
  \else
5932
    \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish
5933
  \fi
5934
}
5935
%
5936
% Arguments to @image:
5937
% #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension.
5938
% #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height.
5939
% #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text.
5940
% #5 is (ignored optional) extension.
5941
% #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing this stuff.
5942
\newif\ifimagevmode
5943
\def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup
5944
  \catcode`\^^M = 5     % in case we're inside an example
5945
  \normalturnoffactive  % allow _ et al. in names
5946
  % If the image is by itself, center it.
5947
  \ifvmode
5948
    \imagevmodetrue
5949
    \nobreak\bigskip
5950
    % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert
5951
    % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space
5952
    % above and below.
5953
    \nobreak\vskip\parskip
5954
    \nobreak
5955
    \line\bgroup\hss
5956
  \fi
5957
  %
5958
  % Output the image.
5959
  \ifpdf
5960
    \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}%
5961
  \else
5962
    % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure.
5963
    \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi
5964
    \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi
5965
    \epsfbox{#1.eps}%
5966
  \fi
5967
  %
5968
  \ifimagevmode \hss \egroup \bigbreak \fi  % space after the image
5969
\endgroup}
5970
 
5971
 
5972
\message{localization,}
5973
% and i18n.
5974
 
5975
% @documentlanguage is usually given very early, just after
5976
% @setfilename.  If done too late, it may not override everything
5977
% properly.  Single argument is the language abbreviation.
5978
% It would be nice if we could set up a hyphenation file here.
5979
%
5980
\def\documentlanguage{\parsearg\dodocumentlanguage}
5981
\def\dodocumentlanguage#1{%
5982
  \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX.
5983
  % Read the file if it exists.
5984
  \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
5985
  \ifeof1
5986
    \errhelp = \nolanghelp
5987
    \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}%
5988
    \let\temp = \relax
5989
  \else
5990
    \def\temp{\input txi-#1.tex }%
5991
  \fi
5992
  \temp
5993
  \endgroup
5994
}
5995
\newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or
5996
is empty.  Maybe you need to install it?  In the current directory
5997
should work if nowhere else does.}
5998
 
5999
 
6000
% @documentencoding should change something in TeX eventually, most
6001
% likely, but for now just recognize it.
6002
\let\documentencoding = \comment
6003
 
6004
 
6005
% Page size parameters.
6006
%
6007
\newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt
6008
 
6009
\chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
6010
\secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt
6011
\subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
6012
 
6013
% Prevent underfull vbox error messages.
6014
\vbadness = 10000
6015
 
6016
% Don't be so finicky about underfull hboxes, either.
6017
\hbadness = 2000
6018
 
6019
% Following George Bush, just get rid of widows and orphans.
6020
\widowpenalty=10000
6021
\clubpenalty=10000
6022
 
6023
% Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're
6024
% using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.  We want the amount of
6025
% stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on
6026
% \hsize.  We call this whenever the paper size is set.
6027
%
6028
\def\setemergencystretch{%
6029
  \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined
6030
    % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway.
6031
    \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}%
6032
  \else
6033
    \emergencystretch = .15\hsize
6034
  \fi
6035
}
6036
 
6037
% Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; 3) voffset;
6038
% 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip.  We also call
6039
% \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define \textleading.
6040
% The caller should also set \parskip.
6041
%
6042
\def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
6043
  \voffset = #3\relax
6044
  \topskip = #6\relax
6045
  \splittopskip = \topskip
6046
  %
6047
  \vsize = #1\relax
6048
  \advance\vsize by \topskip
6049
  \outervsize = \vsize
6050
  \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin
6051
  \pageheight = \vsize
6052
  %
6053
  \hsize = #2\relax
6054
  \outerhsize = \hsize
6055
  \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in
6056
  \pagewidth = \hsize
6057
  %
6058
  \normaloffset = #4\relax
6059
  \bindingoffset = #5\relax
6060
  %
6061
  \setleading{\textleading}
6062
  %
6063
  \parindent = \defaultparindent
6064
  \setemergencystretch
6065
}
6066
 
6067
% Use `small' versions.
6068
%
6069
\def\smallenvironments{%
6070
  \let\smalldisplay = \smalldisplayx
6071
  \let\smallexample = \smalllispx
6072
  \let\smallformat = \smallformatx
6073
  \let\smalllisp = \smalllispx
6074
}
6075
 
6076
% @letterpaper (the default).
6077
\def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
6078
  \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
6079
  \textleading = 13.2pt
6080
  %
6081
  % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even.
6082
  \internalpagesizes{46\baselineskip}{6in}{\voffset}{.25in}{\bindingoffset}{36pt}%
6083
}}
6084
 
6085
% Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.5 (or so) format.
6086
\def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1
6087
  \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt
6088
  \textleading = 12pt
6089
  %
6090
  \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5.in}{\voffset}{.25in}{\bindingoffset}{16pt}%
6091
  %
6092
  \lispnarrowing = 0.3in
6093
  \tolerance = 700
6094
  \hfuzz = 1pt
6095
  \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
6096
  \deftypemargin = 0pt
6097
  \defbodyindent = .5cm
6098
  \smallenvironments
6099
}}
6100
 
6101
% Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper.
6102
\def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
6103
  \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
6104
  \textleading = 12pt
6105
  %
6106
  \internalpagesizes{53\baselineskip}{160mm}{\voffset}{4mm}{\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
6107
  %
6108
  \tolerance = 700
6109
  \hfuzz = 1pt
6110
}}
6111
 
6112
% Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper.
6113
% From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000.
6114
% He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small.
6115
\def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1
6116
  \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt
6117
  \textleading = 12.5pt
6118
  %
6119
  \internalpagesizes{166mm}{120mm}{\voffset}{-8mm}{\bindingoffset}{8pt}%
6120
  %
6121
  \lispnarrowing = 0.2in
6122
  \tolerance = 800
6123
  \hfuzz = 1.2pt
6124
  \contentsrightmargin = 0mm
6125
  \deftypemargin = 0pt
6126
  \defbodyindent = 2mm
6127
  \tableindent = 12mm
6128
  %
6129
  \smallenvironments
6130
}}
6131
 
6132
% A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper.  Top margin
6133
% 29mm, hence bottom margin 28mm, nominal side margin 3cm.
6134
\def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1
6135
  \textleading = 13.6pt
6136
  %
6137
  \afourpaper
6138
  \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}{3.6mm}{3.6mm}{3mm}{7mm}%
6139
  %
6140
  % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper, apparently,
6141
  % although this does not entirely make sense.
6142
  \globaldefs = 0
6143
}}
6144
 
6145
% Use @afourwide to print on European A4 paper in wide format.
6146
\def\afourwide{%
6147
  \afourpaper
6148
  \internalpagesizes{6.5in}{9.5in}{\hoffset}{\normaloffset}{\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
6149
}
6150
 
6151
% @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH]
6152
% Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip,
6153
% and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow.
6154
%
6155
\def\pagesizes{\parsearg\pagesizesxxx}
6156
\def\pagesizesxxx#1{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish}
6157
\def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{%
6158
  \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi
6159
  \globaldefs = 1
6160
  %
6161
  \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
6162
  \setleading{\textleading}%
6163
  %
6164
  \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}{\voffset}{\normaloffset}{\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
6165
}}
6166
 
6167
% Set default to letter.
6168
%
6169
\letterpaper
6170
 
6171
 
6172
\message{and turning on texinfo input format.}
6173
 
6174
% Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text.
6175
\catcode`\"=\other
6176
\catcode`\~=\other
6177
\catcode`\^=\other
6178
\catcode`\_=\other
6179
\catcode`\|=\other
6180
\catcode`\<=\other
6181
\catcode`\>=\other
6182
\catcode`\+=\other
6183
\catcode`\$=\other
6184
\def\normaldoublequote{"}
6185
\def\normaltilde{~}
6186
\def\normalcaret{^}
6187
\def\normalunderscore{_}
6188
\def\normalverticalbar{|}
6189
\def\normalless{<}
6190
\def\normalgreater{>}
6191
\def\normalplus{+}
6192
\def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix
6193
 
6194
% This macro is used to make a character print one way in ttfont
6195
% where it can probably just be output, and another way in other fonts,
6196
% where something hairier probably needs to be done.
6197
%
6198
% #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print
6199
% otherwise.  Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero
6200
% interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all
6201
% typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter.
6202
%
6203
\def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi}
6204
 
6205
% Same as above, but check for italic font.  Actually this also catches
6206
% non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from
6207
% italic fonts.  But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway
6208
% this is not a problem.
6209
\def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi}
6210
 
6211
% Turn off all special characters except @
6212
% (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary).
6213
% Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can
6214
% use math or other variants that look better in normal text.
6215
 
6216
\catcode`\"=\active
6217
\def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}}
6218
\let"=\activedoublequote
6219
\catcode`\~=\active
6220
\def~{{\tt\char126}}
6221
\chardef\hat=`\^
6222
\catcode`\^=\active
6223
\def^{{\tt \hat}}
6224
 
6225
\catcode`\_=\active
6226
\def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_}
6227
% Subroutine for the previous macro.
6228
\def\_{\leavevmode \kern.06em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}}
6229
 
6230
\catcode`\|=\active
6231
\def|{{\tt\char124}}
6232
\chardef \less=`\<
6233
\catcode`\<=\active
6234
\def<{{\tt \less}}
6235
\chardef \gtr=`\>
6236
\catcode`\>=\active
6237
\def>{{\tt \gtr}}
6238
\catcode`\+=\active
6239
\def+{{\tt \char 43}}
6240
\catcode`\$=\active
6241
\def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix
6242
%\catcode 27=\active
6243
%\def^^[{$\diamondsuit$}
6244
 
6245
% Set up an active definition for =, but don't enable it most of the time.
6246
{\catcode`\==\active
6247
\global\def={{\tt \char 61}}}
6248
 
6249
\catcode`+=\active
6250
\catcode`\_=\active
6251
 
6252
% If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file
6253
% name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line.
6254
% So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on.
6255
% \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file.
6256
\def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other}
6257
 
6258
\catcode`\@=0
6259
 
6260
% \rawbackslashxx output one backslash character in current font
6261
\global\chardef\rawbackslashxx=`\\
6262
%{\catcode`\\=\other
6263
%@gdef@rawbackslashxx{\}}
6264
 
6265
% \rawbackslash redefines \ as input to do \rawbackslashxx.
6266
{\catcode`\\=\active
6267
@gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@rawbackslashxx }}
6268
 
6269
% \normalbackslash outputs one backslash in fixed width font.
6270
\def\normalbackslash{{\tt\rawbackslashxx}}
6271
 
6272
% \catcode 17=0   % Define control-q
6273
\catcode`\\=\active
6274
 
6275
% Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters
6276
% even after parsing them.
6277
@def@turnoffactive{@let"=@normaldoublequote
6278
@let\=@realbackslash
6279
@let~=@normaltilde
6280
@let^=@normalcaret
6281
@let_=@normalunderscore
6282
@let|=@normalverticalbar
6283
@let<=@normalless
6284
@let>=@normalgreater
6285
@let+=@normalplus
6286
@let$=@normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix
6287
 
6288
@def@normalturnoffactive{@let"=@normaldoublequote
6289
@let\=@normalbackslash
6290
@let~=@normaltilde
6291
@let^=@normalcaret
6292
@let_=@normalunderscore
6293
@let|=@normalverticalbar
6294
@let<=@normalless
6295
@let>=@normalgreater
6296
@let+=@normalplus
6297
@let$=@normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix
6298
 
6299
% Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily.
6300
% This is canceled by @fixbackslash.
6301
@otherifyactive
6302
 
6303
% If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up.
6304
% That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing
6305
% a backslash.
6306
%
6307
@gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash}
6308
@global@let\ = @eatinput
6309
 
6310
% On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then
6311
% the first `\{ in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix
6312
% that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur.
6313
% Also back turn on active characters that might appear in the input
6314
% file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format.
6315
%
6316
@gdef@fixbackslash{%
6317
  @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi
6318
  @catcode`+=@active
6319
  @catcode`@_=@active
6320
}
6321
 
6322
% Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages.
6323
@escapechar = `@@
6324
 
6325
% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special.
6326
@catcode`@& = @other
6327
@catcode`@# = @other
6328
@catcode`@% = @other
6329
 
6330
@c Set initial fonts.
6331
@textfonts
6332
@rm
6333
 
6334
 
6335
@c Local variables:
6336
@c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp)
6337
@c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message"
6338
@c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{"
6339
@c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H"
6340
@c time-stamp-end: "}"
6341
@c End:

powered by: WebSVN 2.1.0

© copyright 1999-2024 OpenCores.org, equivalent to Oliscience, all rights reserved. OpenCores®, registered trademark.